Quarterlytics / Packaging & Containers / Macfarlane Group PLC

Macfarlane Group PLC

macf · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker macf
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Packaging & Containers
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2022 Annual Report · Macfarlane Group PLC
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
M

a

c

f

a

r

l

a

n

e

G

r

o

u

p

P

L

C

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

2

2

Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Investing to deliver sustainable  
protective packaging solutions

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Contents

Overview

01  
02  

 Financial and sustainability highlights 2022
 Our business at a glance

Strategic review

 Our business model and strategic focus

04  Key financial highlights 2022
05  Chair’s statement
08  
10    Chief Executive’s review
20  
 Finance review
23  Viability statement 
24   Principal risks and uncertainties
29  
33  TCFD report
36  ESG report
50  Non-financial information statement

 Stakeholder engagement s172 statement

Governance

51  Chair’s introduction to governance
52   Board of Directors
54   Report of the Directors
56   Remuneration report 
65   Corporate governance
74  

 Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

Financial statements

 Independent auditor’s report to the members of Macfarlane Group PLC
 Consolidated income statement
 Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
 Consolidated statement of changes in equity 
 Consolidated balance sheet
 Consolidated cash flow statement

75  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  Accounting policies
95  
119  Company balance sheet
120    Company statement of changes in equity
121    Notes to the Company financial statements

 Notes to the financial statements

Shareholder information

132   Principal operating subsidiaries and related undertakings
IBC  Financial diary

View our Annual Report and Accounts and  
other information about Macfarlane Group at  
www.macfarlanegroup.com

Financial and sustainability highlights 2022

01

Macfarlane Group PLC designs, manufactures  
and distributes protective packaging to business 
users. Protective packaging products are sold  
to customers in the UK, Ireland and Europe.

Revenue*

Profit before tax*

Carbon intensity
(tCO2e per £000 revenue)

£290.4m

2022 £290.4m

£19.9m

2022 £19.9m

0.0204

2022 0.0204

2021 £264.5m

2021 £18.7m

2021 0.0234

Operating profit*
(% of sales)

Diluted earnings per share*

GHG emissions

7.4%

9.84p

2022 9.84p

2021 8.62p

5,911 tCO2e

2022 5,911 tCO2e

2021 6,676 tCO2e

2022 7.4%
2021 7.6%

Gross margin*
(% of sales)

33.8%

2022 33.8%
2021 33.8%

*    From continuing operations.

Dividend per share

Accident Frequency Rate (AFR)

3.42p

2022 3.42p

2021 3.20p

0.23

2022 0.23

2021 0.28

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information02 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Our business at a glance

Headquartered in Glasgow, Macfarlane Group PLC employs 
over 1,000 people at 37 sites, principally in the UK, as well as  
in Ireland, Germany and the Netherlands and services more 
than 20,000 customers across a wide range of sectors.

Inverness

Glasgow

Newcastle

Stockton-on-Tees

Leyland

Heywood

Wake�eld

Wicklow

Nottingham

Wolverhampton

Grantham

Leicester

Coventry

Gloucester
Bristol
Westbury

Milton Keynes
Aylesbury

Sudbury

Swindon

Reading

Harlow

Horsham

Salisbury

Fareham

Redruth

Exeter

Plymouth

 Head offices
 Packaging Distribution
 Manufacturing Operations
 Innovation Labs

Venlo

Eppelheim

03

Regional breakdown
Our business is split into four UK regions, 
as well as our European footprint.

A resilient business
We have a resilient business model,  
as outlined in the areas below.

Breadth of customers 
and markets served

Range of long established 
supplier relationships

Focus and depth of expertise 
in protective packaging

Performance driven culture

Value added proposition

Bespoke product and 
service range

Europe *
Sales

£16.4m

No. of employees 51
No. of vehicles 2
No. of sites 3
No. of customers 3,398

North *
Sales

£71.5m

No. of employees 165
No. of vehicles 35
No. of sites 8
No. of customers 3,559

Midlands *
Sales

£87.2m

No. of employees 391
No. of vehicles 43
No. of sites 8
No. of customers 3,131

South west *
Sales

£56.2m

No. of employees 252
No. of vehicles 30
No. of sites 8
No. of customers 6,589

South east *
Sales

£63.4m

No. of employees 153
No. of vehicles 33
No. of sites 7
No. of customers 7,865

*    Numbers relate to 

operating sites only. 
Sales are stated 
before adjusting for 
inter-company and 
inter-divisional sales.

Venlo

Eppelheim

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information04 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Key financial highlights 2022

The key financial highlights of 
Macfarlane Group PLC1 2022  
are set out below:

• 

• 

 Revenue from continuing  
operations grew by 10% versus  
2021 to £290.4m.
 Profit before tax from continuing 
operations at £19.9m increased  
by 7% which is reflected in the 
increase in dividend.

•  Basic and diluted earnings per  

share were 9.89p per share (2021: 
7.98p per share) and 9.78p per share 
(2021: 7.90p per share) respectively.

Packaging Distribution 
•  Packaging Distribution achieved 

revenue growth of 8% to £259.7m 
(2021: £239.5m) through the 
recovery of input prices and the 
benefits from the acquisitions of 
Carters Packaging in March 2021  
and PackMann in May 2022 which 
offset reduced demand from 
e-commerce customers.

•  In line with our strategy to support 
our customers by increasing our 
geographic coverage we acquired 
PackMann in Germany in May 2022. 
PackMann revenues are in line with 
our expectations, but operating 
profit has been impacted by higher 
input costs.

•  Gross margins are stable at 32.1% 
(2021: 32.4%) reflecting effective 
recovery of input price inflation.

•  Operating profit before amortisation 
only increased by 1% to £19.9m (2021: 
£19.7m) due to cost increases. The key 
areas where costs have increased were 
start-up costs related to the new 
North-West of England distribution 
centre, strategic IT investments and 
inflationary pressures primarily in 
labour, energy and logistics costs.

Manufacturing Operations
•  Manufacturing Operations delivered  

an excellent performance in 2022 with 
revenues growing by 23% to £30.8m 
(2021: £25.0m) and operating profit 
before amortisation increasing 42% to 
£5.2m (2021: £3.7m). GWP, acquired in 
February 2021, continued to perform 
well. The Macfarlane Design and 
Manufacture business benefited from 
recovery in the aerospace sector and 
the strengthening of its partnership 
with Packaging Distribution.

•  The Group sold its Labels business  
in December 2021 and this has been 
classified as a discontinued operation. 
Labels recorded a loss before tax of 
£0.1m in 2022 (2021: Loss £0.9m) related 
to finalisation of completion accounts.

Group
•  Net cash inflow from operating activities 
of £18.0m (2021: £23.8m) reflects the 
timing of payments at the year end to 
suppliers and higher 2021 employee 
incentive payments paid in 2022.

•  Net bank debt on 31 December 2022 
was £3.4m, a net cash outflow of 
£5.9m from 31 December 2021, 
including £8.7m of investment in 
acquisitions and a higher level of 
capital expenditure of £3.3m  
related primarily to the fit-out of  
the new distribution centre in the 
North-West of England (£1.3m).  
The Group is operating well within  
its existing bank facility of £30.0m 
and relevant covenants which runs 
until 31 December 2025.

•  The Pension Scheme surplus 

increased to £10.2m at 31 December 
2022 (31 December 2021: £8.3m). 
This improvement is due to continued 
contributions from the Group and an 
increase in the discount rate offset by 
a decline in the value of investments 
during the year. This is against the 
backdrop of considerable volatility in 
the markets, in particular government 
gilt yields.

•  The Board is proposing a final dividend 
of 2.52p per share (2021: 2.33p per 
share) which would take the total 
dividend for 2022 to 3.42p per share 
(2021: 3.20p per share) up 7% on 2021.

Group performance

Continuing operations
Revenue 
Operating profit before amortisation 2 
Operating profit 
Profit before tax
Continuing and discontinued 3 operations
Profit for the year 
Interim and proposed final dividend (pence) 
Basic earnings per share (pence)

2022
£000

2021
£000

Increase 
%

290,431 
25,073 
21,496 
19,934

15,637 
3.42p 
9.89p

264,465 
23,366 
20,055 
18,665

12,598 
3.20p 
7.98p

10% 
7% 
7% 
7%

24% 
7% 
24%

1 

2 

3 

 Macfarlane Group PLC (‘Macfarlane Group’,  
‘the Group’, ‘Macfarlane’).
 See page 89 for reconciliation of Alternative 
Performance Measure operating profit before 
amortisation to operating profit.
 In accordance with IFRS5, the 2021 and 2022 results  
of the Labels business, sold on 31 December 2021, 
have been stated as a discontinued operation.  
The loss for the year from the discontinued 
operation was £0.1m (2021: £1.1m).

Chair’s statement

05

Aleen Gulvanessian

In my first statement as Chair of 
Macfarlane Group, I am pleased to 
report that the Group results for the 
year ended 31 December 2022 were 
ahead of both the previous year and 
market expectations.

Trading
Our performance in 2022 was achieved 
against a background of a marked 
slowdown in spend from the e-commerce 
sector, following strong growth during  
the 2021 Covid-19 lockdown periods, and 
inflationary pressures on operating costs. 

Our Packaging Distribution business 
achieved revenue growth of 8% through 
the benefit of acquisitions, good progress 
from our ‘Follow the Customer’1 strategy 
in Europe and the recovery of raw material 
price inflation. Profitability was only slightly 
higher than 2021 due to the start-up costs 
for our new distribution centre in the 
North-West of England, strategic 
investments in our IT capability and 
inflationary increases in operating costs.

Our Manufacturing Operations have had  
an excellent year, with strong growth in sales 
and operating profit. We benefited from  
the 2021 acquisition of GWP, demand 
recovery in certain industrial markets and the 
partnership with our Packaging Distribution 
business continued to strengthen.

We were able to fund £11.9m (2021: £14.4m) 
of acquisition and capital investment activity 
through our existing bank facilities due to 
the continued strong operating cash flows 
and reinvesting the proceeds from the sale 
of our Labels business in December 2021.

The pension scheme remains in surplus, 
with the Directors working in close 
co-operation with the trustees and  
their advisers to manage investments 
successfully through volatility in the 
markets in the second half of 2022.

The dedication and commitment of all  
our colleagues has been critical to our 
success and I thank them for all their  
hard work in 2022.

Environment, Social and Governance (‘ESG’)
The Group has made good progress in 
2022 on its ESG commitments. We have 
commenced the programme to electrify 
our fleet of delivery vehicles, continued to 
introduce solar panels at our sites, worked 
with our customers to move to more 
sustainable plastic products and invested 
in an additional Innovation Lab to help our 
customers reduce their carbon footprint. 
The Board is now more diverse and we have 
increased our level of engagement with the 
local communities in which we operate.

Board changes
As set out in the Interim Report 2022, 
Stuart Paterson stood down as Chair at 
the end of September 2022 and the Board 
would like to thank Stuart for his valuable 
contribution as Chair and prior to that as  
a Non-Executive Director. 

On 1 October 2022, Laura Whyte was 
appointed to the Board as an independent 
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee. Laura brings 
extensive commercial and human resources 
experience to the Board.

Proposed dividend
The Board is proposing a final dividend of  
2.52 pence per share, amounting to a full year 
dividend of 3.42 pence per share (2021: 3.20 
pence per share), an increase of 7%. Subject 
to the approval of shareholders at the Annual 
General Meeting on Tuesday 9 May 2023 the 
final dividend will be paid on Thursday 1 June 
2023 to those shareholders on the register  
at Friday 12 May 2023.

Outlook
We anticipate that 2023 will be another 
challenging year with uncertainty over the 
impact of the increase in the cost of living on 
customer demand, rising operating costs, 
particularly related to labour and energy, and 
increasing interest costs. Despite these 
challenges, with the effectiveness of our 
strategy, the resilience of our business model 
and the experience and commitment of  
our people, we expect Macfarlane Group to 
continue to deliver further growth in 2023.

Aleen Gulvanessian 
Chair

23 February 2023

1 

 ‘Follow the Customer’ is the Group’s strategy to 
provide UK customers with access to its products 
and services in mainland Europe.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information 
06 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Chair’s statement 
(continued)

It is vital we are at the forefront  
of sustainable offerings in relation  
to protective packaging in order  
to continue our overall growth.

Our new chair Aleen Gulvanessian 
answers questions about her role  
and the key strategic decisions  
facing the board, to ensure  
continued growth.

Q.What can we expect to see 

from Macfarlane that will be 
different from before with 
you in the Chair?

A.Well firstly I must commend Stuart 

Paterson for his excellent stewardship  
of the Group during his successful tenure 
as Chair. It is not an easy act to follow, but  
I hope with my experience in Corporate 
M&A and Governance I can bring my own 
style to support the executive team to 
continue to grow the Group in the best 
interests of all our stakeholders and with  
a focus on ESG. I like the culture and 
purpose of the Group and that is not 
something I will be looking to change.

Q.Macfarlane has grown 

consistently over the past 
decade, how do you plan to 
maintain this momentum?

A. What is interesting is that whilst we have 

grown considerably, both organically and 
through acquisition, the opportunities for 
further growth are still very much there. We 
are well positioned to continue our organic 
growth through our sustainable value 
offering to customers, as well as continuing 
to execute on our acquisition pipeline.  
Our acquisition in Europe last year opens 
up a wider market with strong growth 
opportunities and complements our 
existing ‘Follow the Customer’ programme.

Q.With the sale of Labels last  

year, Macfarlane is now ‘pure 
protective packaging’. Is that 
how you see the business  
going forward?

A.We were sad to lose our Labels colleagues, 

many of whom had been at Macfarlane for 
a considerable length of time. However,  
it was the right strategic decision for the 
Group and for the Labels business, which  
I hope will flourish under its new owners. 
Being a ‘pure protective packaging’ player, 
allows us to focus on our core strengths 
and leverage our scale. I see us remaining  
in the protective packaging space, however 
we will always keep a close eye on adjacent 
products or markets that may add value 
to our customers and complement our 
existing business model.

Q.Last year saw Macfarlane’s 

first overseas acquisition in 
some years, do you plan 
further European acquisitions?

A.

It was very pleasing to have made our  
first protective packaging acquisition  
in Europe. This has increased our profile  
in Europe and has already resulted in an 
increased pipeline of potential future 
opportunities. Whilst our core acquisition 
pipeline will remain focused on the UK,  
we will continue to be amenable to high 
quality opportunities within Europe that 
complement our ‘Follow the Customer’ 
programme. Whilst we are excited about 
expansion in Europe, we will expand with 
care and be selective with our targets.

07

Q.As the cost-of-living crisis 

continues, what are you  
doing to help your people 
manage this and how are you 
managing staff retention?

A.Historically our salary increases tend to 

be a flat percentage across the board. 
However this year we had a range of 
increases with the highest percentages 
being awarded to those at the lower 
end of our salary scales. This highlights 
our commitment to help those most  
in need at this challenging time.

We also have increased our employee 
assistance programmes available, so 
that where needed further support can 
be provided to our employees in areas 
such as mental health, wellbeing, 
financial advice etc.

Staff retention is critical for us: only by 
attracting and retaining the best talent 
can we continue to thrive as a business.  
I was pleased to be involved in the latest 
intake to our Leadership Development 
Programme in 2022, where I met more 
of our high potential current and future 
leaders. It is through development 
programmes like this, continuing to 
invest in our people, and rewarding them 
appropriately, that we can continue to 
retain our most talented individuals.

Q.Are you confident that you’ll  

be able to maintain margins for 
Macfarlane in the face of the 
cost inflation that you and many 
other businesses are facing? 

A. 

Costs are currently increasing in many 
areas. Macfarlane has been experiencing 
significant increases in its paper and 
polymer based products since 2020, 
driven by increased demand and supply 
constraints during the Covid-19 period. 
The price of both paper and polymer 
based products are always fluctuating. 
However, working with our customers we 
have effectively managed price changes 
over many years. I am confident in our 
ability to continue to do this and at the 
same time maintain our margins.

Increases in labour and energy costs  
will be a challenge, but we have plans in 
place to offset these increases and our 
investments in IT and more efficient 
Distribution Centres are examples of how 
we are looking to improve productivity.

Q.There is growing pressure  

on businesses to use less 
packaging: does that signal  
the decline of packaging 
businesses like Macfarlane?

A.On the contrary, this actually fits well with 

our business model and value offering. 
Packaging will always be necessary but 
packaging suppliers need to respond  
to the ever-changing needs of their 
customers. Because Macfarlane is 
primarily a distributor, we are able to flex 
our offerings to the customer to enable 
them to optimise their packaging – 
reducing their total costs and ours. With 
our two Innovation Labs, in Milton Keynes 
and Heywood, we help design bespoke 

packaging solutions for customers. This 
enables our customers to reduce the 
amount of packaging they use, improve 
the efficiency of their packing operations 
and protect their reputation with their 
own customers by reducing damages and 
returns. This saves them money and in 
most cases reduces their carbon footprint 
– so it is pleasing that we are already well 
on the front foot in this area and we are 
committed to continuously improving our 
proposition to add value for our customers.

Q.The whole environment, social 

and governance (ESG) agenda 
remains a key focus for many 
businesses. How important will 
this be for Macfarlane Group 
going forward?

A.

It is difficult to over-estimate how 
important ESG is and will be going 
forward. It is clear that consumer 
consciousness in relation to the 
sustainability of the packaging they 
receive is only increasing. It is vital we are  
at the forefront of sustainable offerings in 
relation to protective packaging in order  
to continue our overall growth. In respect 
of our own carbon footprint, the 
introduction of electric delivery vehicles  
is a major initiative to reduce our carbon 
emissions. From a social perspective,  
we are proud of the way we looked after 
our employees during the Covid-19 
challenges, and we continue to review our 
working practices in consultation with our 
workforce to allow more flexible working 
as well as create new initiatives such as 
our new employee volunteer day. As for 
Governance, we now have a third of the 
Board being female, adding the strength 
of diversity to the Board. ESG is a standing 
item on our Board agenda and ESG 
matters will naturally be key factors in  
any Board decisions in 2023 and beyond.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information08 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Our business model and strategic focus

How we create value from innovative packaging solutions

Our inputs

The key capabilities and resources we have 
which provide sustainable competitive 
advantage in our marketplace.

Financial
The funds available to us
Our consistent cash generation; the strength of  
our balance sheet and our financial discipline provide  
us with the capital to re-invest in the business and 
make quality acquisitions.

Operations 
Infrastructure, capability and tools
We stay close to our customers through  
our local service centres, and have flexible  
manufacturing capability as well.

Intellectual
Organisational, knowledge-based intangibles
We use our packaging industry experience and  
skills to create sustainable packaging products  
and solutions for our customers.

Human
The skills and know-how of our employees
The commitment, expertise and diversity of  
our people, are the main drivers of our business  
and the key to our continued success.

Social and environmental
Our relationships with our stakeholders
We have a unique culture that is embedded  
throughout our business. We also actively 
engage with our key stakeholders.



Our business model

The fundamental activities of our business  
that utilise these resources and capabilities.

Our purpose
Ensuring our customers 
products are effectively  
and sustainably protected  
in storage and transport

What we do
We design, manufacture  
and distribute protective 
packaging products to  
a diverse range of sectors

aerospace

automotive

e-commerce
retail

electronics

food

high street
retail

hospitality

household
essentials

logistics

medical

How we do it
•   Adapting our flexible geographic footprint  

to stay close to our customers

•  Adopting a ‘stock and serve’ approach
•  >1000 global suppliers of protective packaging
•  37 sites
•  Employing >1000 people
•  Serving 20,000 customers

This business model is underpinned  
by our five strategic focus areas:

Profitable organic growth
Acquisition growth
Operational efficiency
People development
Environmental excellence

Profitable organic growth
We are committed to growing  
organically through offering  
innovative and sustainable  
packaging solutions to customers  
in target markets.

Acquisition growth
We have an active pipeline of 
opportunities in both the UK  
and mainland Europe, and aim  
to execute around two per year.

Our business model



Creating value

09

By employing our capabilities and resources, we create the following  
value for our stakeholders including our customers; people; shareholders, 
suppliers, employees and the communities we operate within.

Financial
13 years of consecutive profit growth,  
and consistent strong cash generation.

7.4%operating profit

Operations
Leading UK protective packaging distributor,  
with 27 Regional Distribution Centres (RDC). 

European expansion
Following acquisition of PackMann, Germany in 2022, 
increased geographic footprint into mainland Europe.

Growing manufacturing capability

Intellectual
Our customers value our people, and their passion  
for our products.

Retention
Strong staff retention at management level.

 33.8% gross margin (2021: 33.8%)
• 
•  Operating profit up 7% to £21.5m
• 
• 
•  £18m cash generated from operations

 £5.3m in taxes paid 
 £5.1m in dividends paid to our shareholders

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 
• 
• 

 Providing just-in-time service to our customers  
through ‘stock and serve’ distribution model
 Utilising manufacturing division as a flexible  
support to distribution
 Ensuring safety of customer products through  
protective packaging 
 Expanding our European offering through the  
‘follow the customer’ strategy and acquisitions

 Enhancing career opportunities through training
 Improving knowledge through innovation
 Empowering customers through training  
and education

•  NPS score of 50 (2021: 48)

Human
Our diversity is our strength, demonstrated by our  
lack of a gender pay gap. Our employees continue  
to deliver solutions and strong service to customers.

33%Female proportion of senior leadership team

• 

• 

• 

 Protecting the health of employees through 
Operational Integrity excellence and wellbeing 
programmes
 Promoting from within where possible, creating 
growth opportunities in the Company
 Enhanced Employee Assistance Programme (‘EAP’) 
including 24/7 support and focus on mental health

Social and environmental
We are fully committed to supporting local  
communities and the environment. 

85%of our sites are now FSC certified

•  Reduced our absolute CO2 footprint by 11%
• 
• 
• 

 Increased focus on the recyclability of our products
 Rolled out Volunteer Day in 2022
 Increased Board diversity with 33% female  
representation including new Chair

Operational efficiency
We invest to make all our assets  
more productive – property,  
transport and people.

People development
Our people are our greatest asset,  
and we look to invest in our people  
at all levels to up-skill them to take  
on greater roles within the Company.

For more information on our  
people development see page 45.

Environmental excellence
We are committed to reducing our 
environmental footprint, and supporting 
the communities we operate in. 

For more information on our 
environmental excellence see  
pages 38 to 43.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information10 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Chief Executive’s review

Packaging Distribution
Revenue

£259.7m

2022 £259.7m

2021 £239.5m

Operating profit

£17.1m

2022 £17.1m
2021 £17.1m

Return on sales

6.6%

2022 6.6%
2021 7.1%

Macfarlane’s Packaging Distribution 
business is the UK’s leading specialist 
distributor of protective packaging 
materials, with a growing presence in 
Europe. Macfarlane operates a stock and 
serve supply model in the UK, Ireland, 
the Netherlands and Germany from 27 
Regional Distribution Centres (‘RDCs’) 
and three satellite sites, supplying 
industrial and retail customers with  
a comprehensive range of protective 
packaging materials on a local, regional 
and national basis.

Competition in the packaging distribution 
market is from local and regional protective 
packaging specialist companies as well  
as national/international distribution 
generalists who supply a range of 
products, including protective packaging 
materials. Macfarlane competes effectively 
on a local basis through its strong focus on 
customer service, its breadth and depth of 
product offer and through the recruitment 
and retention of high-quality staff with 
good local market knowledge. On a 
national basis, Macfarlane has market 
focus, expertise and a breadth of product 
and service knowledge, all of which  
enable it to compete effectively against 
non-specialist packaging distributors.

Packaging Distribution benefits its 
customers by enabling them to ensure their 
products are cost-effectively protected in 
transit and storage through the supply of 
a comprehensive product range, single 
source stock and serve supply, just–in-time 
delivery, tailored stock management 
programmes, electronic trading and 
independent advice on both packaging 
materials and packing processes. Through 

the ‘Significant Six’1 sales approach we 
reduce our customers’ ‘Total Cost of 
Packaging’ and their carbon footprint. 
This is achieved through supplying 
effective packaging solutions, optimising 
warehousing and transportation, reducing 
damages and returns and improving 
packaging efficiency.

2022 trading
The main features of Packaging 
Distribution’s performance in 2022 were:

•  Increase in revenue of £20.1m:
  –  Organic revenue growth in the UK and 

Ireland of £8.4m has been achieved 
through recovery in some industrial 
sectors, particularly in aerospace, 
engineering and hospitality, and 
inflation in pricing offset by a  
marked reduction in demand from 
e-commerce customers, most of 
which benefited from the Covid-19 
lockdowns in H1 2021.

  –  Our ‘Follow the Customer’ strategy in 

Northern Europe achieved £2.9m of 
incremental sales through the Group 
subsidiary in the Netherlands, with 
the business now generating profits.
  –  Sales growth of £8.8m was achieved 
from the acquisitions of Carters 
Packaging, Cornwall, in March 2021 
and PackMann, Germany, in May 2022. 
The PackMann pre-acquisition costs 
of £0.2m were expensed in 2022. 
•  New business in 2022 at £8.9m was 

lower than 2021. Following the supply 
chain challenges of 2020/21 customers 
were less inclined to switch supply  
and our sales team prioritised the 
management of input price increases 
with our customers.

Packaging Distribution performance

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross margin
Operating expenses
Operating profit before amortisation*
Amortisation

Operating profit

2022
£000

259,651
176,193

83,458
63,590

19,868
2,774

17,094

2021
£000

2022 
change

239,508
161,896

77,612
57,915

19,697
2,642

17,055

8%
9%

8%
10%

1%

-%

* See page 89 for reconciliation of Alternative Performance Measure operating profit before amortisation to operating profit.

11

•  Effective management of significant 

input price increases across all product 
categories in H2 2021 and H1 2022 has 
enabled us to broadly maintain gross 
margin at 32.1% (2021: 32.4%).

•  Overhead costs in 2022 were £5.7m 
higher than 2021. This is attributable  
to the effect of acquisitions, strategic IT 
investments, the start-up costs for our 
new distribution centre in the North-West 
of England and the impact of inflation 
on labour, energy and logistics costs.

Future
Our plans for 2023 are focused on 
continuing to grow sales and improving 
profitability through the following actions:

•  Prioritise engagement with potential 

new customers in sectors where we see 
future growth opportunities such as 
e-commerce retail, medical, scientific, 
and third-party logistics.

•  Continue to effectively manage  
input price changes and supply  
chain challenges as they arise.
•  Maximise the benefits from our 

‘Packaging Optimiser’2 which was 
launched to our sales teams to better 
demonstrate our ability to add value for 
customers through our ‘Significant Six’ 
sales approach.

•  Achieve benefits from our information 
technology investments in Microsoft 
Dynamics, Slimstock and Warehouse 
Management.

•  Refine and extend our product range 
to ensure we continue to offer our 
customers sustainable packaging 
solutions that reduce their carbon 
footprint.

•  Introduce improvements to our 
web-based solutions to allow 
customers access to our full range  
of products and services more easily.

•  Accelerate the progress we have 

made in Europe through our ‘Follow 
the Customer’ programme and our 
recent acquisition of PackMann.
•  Reduce operating costs through 
efficiency programmes in sales, 
logistics and administration.

•  Realise the benefits from our new 

distribution centre in the North-West 
of England, including the new 
Innovation Lab due to open in  
March 2023.

•  Plan our second major site 

consolidation in the East Midlands.
•  Maintain the focus on working capital 
management to facilitate future 
investment and manage effectively 
the ongoing bad debt risk within the 
current economic environment.
•  Supplement organic growth through 
progressing further high-quality 
acquisitions in the UK and Europe.

1 

2 

 ‘Significant Six’ represents the six key costs in  
a customers’ packing process being transport, 
warehousing, administration, damages and returns, 
productivity and customer experience.
 Packaging Optimiser is a Macfarlane developed 
software tool that measures the financial and carbon 
benefits of the Significant Six selling approach.

The acquisition of PackMann  
was an important strategic step  
and complements our ‘Follow the 
Customer’ programme in Europe.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information12 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Chief Executive’s review 
(continued)

Investing in 
sustainable 
packaging 
solutions

13

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information14 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Chief Executive’s review 
(continued)

Manufacturing Operations
Revenue

Manufacturing Operations comprises 
our Packaging Design and Manufacture 
business and GWP, acquired in  
February 2021. 

£30.8m

2022 £30.8m

2021 £25.0m

Operating profit

£4.4m

2022 £4.4m

2021 £3.0m

Return on sales

14.3%

2022 14.3%

2021 12.0%

Manufacturing Operations designs, 
manufactures, assembles and distributes 
bespoke packaging solutions for customers 
requiring cost-effective methods of 
protecting high value products in storage 
and transit. The primary raw materials  
are corrugate, timber and foam. The 
businesses operate from four 
manufacturing sites, in Grantham, 
Westbury, Swindon and Salisbury, 
supplying both directly to customers  
and through the national RDC network  
of the Packaging Distribution business.

Key market sectors are defence, 
aerospace, medical equipment, 
electronics, automotive, e-commerce 
retail and household equipment. The 
markets we serve are highly fragmented, 
with a range of locally based competitors. 
We differentiate our market offering 
through technical expertise, design 
capability, industry accreditations and 
national coverage through the Packaging 
Distribution business.

2022 trading
The impressive growth in operating  
profit of 47% in Manufacturing Operations 
has been achieved through:

•  Organic sales growth of 15% (£1.4m), 

due mainly to recovery in the aerospace 
(defence and commercial) sector and 
inflation in pricing.

•  Sales growth of £4.4m achieved from 
the acquisition of GWP in February 
2021, which has benefited from strong 
demand from its industrial customers 
and inflation in pricing.

•  Strengthening of the partnership 

between Manufacturing Operations 
and Packaging Distribution.

•  Effective management of increasing 
input prices with our customers to 
maintain gross margin. 

•  Good control of operating costs, 
against a backdrop of inflation in 
logistics, labour and energy costs.

Manufacturing Operations performance

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross margin
Operating expenses
Operating profit before amortisation*
Amortisation

Operating profit

2022
£000

30,780
16,181

14,599
9,394

5,205
803

4,402

2021
£000

2022 
change

24,957
13,102

11,855
8,186

3,669
669

3,000

23%
24%

23%
15%

42%

47%

* See page 89 for reconciliation of Alternative Performance Measure operating profit before amortisation to operating profit.

15

Future
Priorities for Manufacturing Operations 
in 2023 are to:

•  Focus the sales team on new 

business growth in target sectors 
e.g., medical and defence.

•  Prioritise new sales activity on  

our higher added-value bespoke 
composite pack product range.

•  Work with our customers to 

effectively manage material price 
changes to minimise the impact  
on gross margins.

•  Continue to strengthen the 

relationship with our Packaging 
Distribution businesses to create 
both sales and cost synergies.
•  Commence the process of GWP 
working more closely with the 
Macfarlane Packaging Design  
and Manufacture and Packaging 
Distribution businesses.

•  Supplement organic growth through 
progressing further high-quality 
acquisitions in the UK.

We differentiate our market offering 
through technical expertise, design 
capability, industry accreditations  
and national coverage through the 
Packaging Distribution business.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information16 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Chief Executive’s review 
(continued)

Investing in 
sustainable 
infrastructure

17

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information18 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Chief Executive’s review 
(continued)

Group
The Group has achieved sales  
growth of 10% and operating profit 
growth of 7% in 2022 while making 
significant investments in the future 
of the business including the first 
major site consolidation, upgrading 
our information technology and 
making our first acquisition outside 
the UK to supplement our ‘Follow the 
Customer’ programme in Europe.

2023 outlook
The Group’s businesses all have strong 
market positions with low customer 
concentration and differentiated product 
and service offerings, providing both  
value and sustainability to our customers. 
We have a flexible business model and 
proven effective implementation of  
our strategic plan, which is reflected in 
consistent profit and cash generation 
over a sustained period. 

Our future performance continues to 
depend on our effectiveness in growing 
sales, increasing efficiencies and bringing 
high quality acquisitions into the Group. 
There will continue to be significant 
challenges in 2023, with rising costs and 
uncertainties over demand in some sectors. 
However, our strategy and business model 
have proved to be resilient and we expect 
to deliver further growth in 2023.

Peter D. Atkinson
Chief Executive

23 February 2023

Group performance

Segment
Distribution
Manufacturing Operations

Continuing operations 

% of revenue
Discontinued operations

Group total

Operating
profit/(loss) 
before
amortisation*
2022
£000

Operating
profit/(loss)
2022
£000

19,868
5,205

25,073

8.6%
(87)

17,094
4,402

21,496

7.4%
(87)

Operating
profit before
amortisation*
2021
£000

Operating
profit
2021
£000

19,697
3,669

23,366

8.8%
372

17,055
3,000

20,055

7.6%
372

Revenue
2021
£000

239,508
24,957

264,465

21,220

Revenue
2022
£000

259,651
30,780

290,431

–

290,431

24,986

21,409

285,685

23,738

20,427

* See page 89 for reconciliation of Alternative Performance Measure operating profit before amortisation to operating profit.

 
Macfarlane Packaging Optimiser
At Macfarlane Packaging, we have spent 
decades innovating and perfecting packaging 
solutions for a wide range of markets that 
are strong, efficient and sustainable.
With that experience we have created the 
Packaging Optimiser – a new interactive  
tool that shows businesses the true financial 
and environmental cost of their packaging. 
The Packaging Optimiser illustrates six 
important costs that impact on most 
packaging operations – we call these  
‘The Significant Six’, as well as the material 
cost itself. These areas can account for 
90% of all costs in a packaging operation.
The Packaging Optimiser analyses the 
client’s own Significant Six profile and with 
that information we can:
-  review material options to find the  

right packaging 

- meet their corporate sustainability goals 
- unlock savings in their packaging operations

19

Storage costs
• Free up space for growth 
• Reduce storage costs 
• Reduce pallet handling 
• Reduce the impact on goods-in

Transport costs
• Improve delivery fleet utilisation 
• Reduce transport costs 
• Reduce carbon emissions

Damages and returns
• Reduce product waste 
• Reduce administration and handling 
• Reduce transportation 
• Reduce packaging waste 
• Improve the customer experience

Admin costs
• Free up time 
• Work more effectively 
• Reduce costs

Increased productivity
• Make informed decisions on pack cost 
• Reduce labour costs or reallocate time 
• Fulfil forecasted business growth
• Reduce material waste

Customer experience
Optimised packaging all contributes 
to the ideal customer experience. 
From quick dispatch through to 
unboxing and easy recycling.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information20 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Finance review

Trading review
The Group saw growth in sales from 
continuing operations of 10% during 
2022, driven by organic growth in 
Packaging Distribution (5%) and 
Manufacturing Operations (15%) 
combined with a strong contribution 
from the acquisitions made in 2021  
and 2022. Group sales from continuing 
operations are £290.4m, an increase  
of £26.0m from 2021. Profit before tax 
from continuing operations for 2022 
increased to £19.8m, an increase of 
£1.2m from that achieved in 2021.

The Group sold its Labels business on 
31 December 2021 and it was disclosed 
as a discontinued operation. The loss 
before tax of £0.1m in 2022 relates  
to adjustments and costs following 
finalisation of completion accounts 
(2021: loss £0.9m). 

Each month our management 
reporting provides the information to 
review the productivity of all locations  
in the Packaging Distribution business 
using performance against benchmark 
metrics as a percentage of sales for 
gross margin, payroll and related 
employment costs, property costs, 
other overheads and net profit. The 
resultant net profit by location is also 
compared to the original budget and 
prior year performance.

Our Manufacturing Operations also 
measure relevant operating costs to 
sales ratios and net profit generated.

2022 represents 
the Group’s 
thirteenth 
consecutive year  
of growth in its  
profit before tax.

Taxation
The tax charge for 2022 was £4.2m, a  
rate of 21.2%, above the prevailing rate  
of 19.0% mainly due to the share option 
costs, acquisition costs and disposal costs 
not being deductible for tax purposes and 
deferred tax being applied at the long-term 
corporation tax rate of 25%. This compared 
with a tax charge of £5.1m in 2021, a rate 
of 28.9% due primarily to the effect on 
deferred tax of an adjustment in the 
long-term corporation tax rate from  
19% to 25% and goodwill impairment, 
acquisition costs and disposal costs not 
being tax deductible for tax purposes.

Macfarlane Group and its subsidiary 
companies have no uncertain tax 
treatments with HMRC in the UK.

Earnings per share
Basic and diluted earnings per share 
amounted to 9.89p (2021: 7.98p) and 
9.78p (2021: 7.90p) respectively, broadly 
reflective of the movement in profitability. 
The calculations take account of the 
dilution caused by the issue of LTIP awards.

Dividends
A dividend of 0.90p per share was paid  
on 13 October 2022. A further dividend  
of 2.52p per share is subject to approval  
by shareholders at the AGM in May 2023 
and is not included as a liability in these 
financial statements.

Profit before tax (£m) from total operations

2022 
19.8

2021 
17.7

2020 
13.0

2019 
11.9

2018 
10.7

2017 
9.1

2016 
7.6

2015
6.8

2009 
3.2

2010 
3.4

2012 
4.5

2011 
3.9

2014 
5.6

2013 
5.1

21

Dividend cover is 2.9 times. The Group 
continues to balance the aim to pay an 
attractive level of dividend against the 
need to retain funds in the business  
to finance growth, make the agreed  
levels of pension fund contributions,  
fund acquisitions and meet capital 
expenditure requirements.

Cash flow and net bank debt
The Group’s debt facility with Lloyds 
Banking Group PLC comprises a committed 
borrowing facility of up to £30.0m secured 
over part of Macfarlane Group’s trade 
receivables which extends to 31 December 
2025. The facility bears interest at normal 
commercial rates and carries standard 
financial covenants in relation to interest 
cover and levels of headroom over trade 
receivables. The Group has been in 
compliance with these covenants 
throughout 2022 and 2023 to date.

The facility accommodates increased 
working capital requirements from our 
organic growth as well as finance for 
pension scheme contributions and an 
ability to fund acquisitions. Our financing 
requirements are met through cash 
generation from profitable trading as well 
as by maintaining committed borrowing 
facilities for the medium-term.

Group net bank debt was £3.4m at  
31 December 2022, a cash outflow of 
£5.9m from 2021 as set out in note 22. The 
Group’s cash generation continued to be 
strong enabling us to finance growth, make 
agreed levels of pension contributions, fund 
acquisitions and meet capital expenditure 
requirements. The Group spent £8.7m  
on acquisitions in 2022 (2021: £12.2m), 

£3.3m on capital expenditure in 2022 
(2021: £2.1m) and received £0.2m after 
finalisation of the completion accounts 
related to the disposal of Labels sold  
on 31 December 2021.

We will continue to invest where there  
are needs or opportunities to meet future 
growth plans. The Group will strive to ensure 
that in 2023, operating profit generation is, 
at the very minimum, matched by cash 
generation from operations. The Group 
will remain prudent in its assessment of 
the likely returns from capital expenditure 
and potential acquisitions.

Acquisitions/disposals
On 17 May 2022, the Group acquired 
100% of PackMann Gessellschaft für 
Verpackungen und Dienstleistungen  
mbH (‘PackMann’), for a maximum 
consideration, excluding cash/bank 
balances and bank borrowings acquired, 
of £7.4m. £5.9m was paid in cash on 
acquisition and a recovery for closing 
balance sheet adjustments of £0.6m was 
received on 30 August 2022 primarily 
related to net bank borrowings inherited 
by the Group. Deferred consideration of 
£1.5m is payable in the second quarters  
of 2023 and 2024, subject to certain 
stretching trading targets being met in 
the two twelve-month periods ending  
on 31 May 2023 and 2024 respectively. 

The trading targets set for the two twelve 
month periods are an enhancement over 
the profit levels being achieved in the 
period prior to acquisition and these  
are considered unlikely to be achieved. 
Therefore its not considered probable that 
deferred consideration will be payable.

Following strong trading performances 
from both GWP Holdings Limited and 
Carters Packaging (Cornwall) Limited  
in their first year post acquisition 
contingent consideration payments  
of £2.2m and £0.7m respectively  
were made in 2022, in line with the 
amounts recognised as contingent 
consideration at 31 December 2021. 
We expect to pay a further £3.7m in 
contingent consideration for the GWP 
and Carters Packaging acquisitions in 
2023 based on their continuing strong 
trading performances.

Market capitalisation and  
share price movements
The number of shares in issue at  
31 December 2022 was 158,337,000 an 
increase of 525,000 from 31 December 
2021. On 16 May 2022, the Company 
issued 525,000 ordinary shares of 25p 
to settle 2019 share awards under  
the Company’s 2016 Performance 
Share Plan.

At the year-end the Company’s market 
capitalisation was £164.7m, compared 
with £205.2m last year. The share price 
at 31 December 2022 was 104.00p, 
compared with 130.00p at 31 December 
2021. The range of transaction prices 
for Macfarlane Group shares during 
2022 was 85.20p to 135.25p for each 
ordinary share of 25p.

The Group’s cash generation continued 
to be strong enabling us to finance 
growth, make agreed levels of pension 
contributions, fund acquisitions and  
meet capital expenditure requirements.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information22 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Finance review  
(continued)

Financial instruments
The Group’s principal financial 
instruments comprise bank 
borrowings, cash balances and other 
items, such as trade receivables and 
trade payables that arise directly from 
its operations as well as shareholders’ 
equity and deferred consideration 
arising from acquisitions. The main 
purpose of these financial instruments 
is to provide finance for the Group’s 
operations. It is the Group’s policy  
that no speculative trading in financial 
instruments is undertaken. The main 
risks arising are liquidity risk and credit 
risk and the secondary risks are 
interest rate risk and currency risk.  
The policies for managing these risks, 
which have remained unchanged since 
the beginning of 2022 are set out in 
note 15 to the financial statements.

Pension schemes
The Group’s pension scheme surplus 
at 31 December 2022 was £10.2m 
(2021: £8.3m). This is sensitive to 
movements in bond yields, inflation, 
longevity assumptions and investment 
returns. The impact of these 
sensitivities is set out in note 24 to the 
financial statements. This, combined 
with careful stewardship of the 
investment portfolio by the trustees,  
in conjunction with the Group, has 
helped match the investments with  
the scheme’s liability profile.

Following the triennial actuarial valuation 
of the scheme at 1 May 2020, the Group 
agreed a new schedule of contributions 
with the Pension Scheme Trustees, which 
assumed a recovery plan period of four 
years. Annual contributions have been 
£1.3m since 1 May 2021.

The next triennial actuarial valuation  
will be carried out at 1 May 2023.

Following the sale of Macfarlane Labels 
Limited, the company ceased to be a 
sponsoring employer and during 2022  
the Group paid £0.7m into the pension 
scheme in 2022 to satisfy the debt agreed 
with the trustees in relation to this event. 
The Scheme was closed to future accrual 
on 30 November 2022 with the three 
remaining active members transferring  
to the Group’s defined contribution 
pension scheme.

The Group operates a number of defined 
contribution arrangements for the majority 
of the employee base. Over 750 of our 
employees are members of one of our 
pension scheme arrangements.

International Financial Reporting 
Standards and accounting policies
The Group continues to comply with all 
International Financial Reporting Standards 
adopted by the United Kingdom.

Going concern
The Directors, in their consideration of 
going concern, have reviewed the Group’s 
cash flow forecasts and profit projections, 
which are based on the Directors’ past 
experience and their assessment of the 
current market outlook for the business. 
The Group’s business activities together 
with the factors likely to affect its future 
development, performance and financial 
position are set out in the Chair’s Statement 
and the Strategic Report on pages 4 to 50. 
The Directors have carried out a detailed 
scenario analysis over three years to  
31 December 2025 as set out in the 
Viability Statement on page 23.

After making enquiries, the Directors  
have a reasonable expectation that the 
Company and the Group have adequate 
resources to continue in operational 
existence for at least the next twelve 
months. For this reason they continue  
to adopt the going concern basis in 
preparing the financial statements.

Ivor Gray
Finance Director

23 February 2023

We will continue to invest where  
there are needs or opportunities  
to meet future growth plans.

 
Viability statement

23

The Board is required to formally assess 
that the Group has adequate resources 
to continue in operational existence for 
the foreseeable future and as such can 
continue to adopt the going concern 
basis of accounting. The Board is also 
required to state that it has a reasonable 
expectation that the Group will continue 
in operation and meet its longer-term 
liabilities as they fall due.

To support this statement, the Board is 
required to consider the Group’s current 
financial position, its strategy, the market 
outlook and its principal risks. The Board’s 
assessment of the principal risks facing 
the Group and how these risks affect the 
Group’s prospects are set out on pages 
24 to 28. The review also includes 
consideration of how these risks could 
prevent the Group from achieving its 
strategic plan and the potential impact 
these risks could have on the Group’s 
business model, future performance, 
solvency and liquidity over the next  
three years (starting from 1 January).

The Board considers the Group’s viability as 
part of its ongoing programme to manage 
risk. Each year the Board reviews the 
Group’s strategic plan for the forthcoming 
three-year period and challenges the 
Executive team on the plan’s risks. The plan 
reflects the Group’s businesses, which have 
a broad spread of customers across a range 
of different sectors with some longer-term 
contracts in place. The assessment 
period of three years is consistent with 
the Board’s review of the Group strategy, 
including assumptions around future 
growth rates for our business and 
acceptable levels of performance.

Financial modelling and scenarios
The Group’s existing bank facilities 
comprise a £30m committed facility with 
Lloyds Banking Group, which is available 
until December 2025. The Group has 
performed well during 2022, despite the 
ongoing challenging market conditions, 
which gives confidence in the strength  
of the underlying business model. The 
Directors have also considered the 
longer-term economic outlook for the  
UK. Given the current uncertainty of the 
economic outlook we have modelled a 
‘severe but plausible downside’ scenario  
as described below. In forming conclusions, 
the Directors have also considered 
potential mitigating actions that the Group 
could take to preserve liquidity and ensure 
compliance with its financial covenants.

A detailed financial model covering a 
three-year period is maintained and 
regularly updated. This model enables 
sensitivity analysis, which includes flexing 
the main assumptions, including future 
revenue growth, gross margins, operating 
costs, finance costs and working capital 
management. The results of flexing these 
assumptions, both individually and in 
aggregate, are used to determine whether 
additional bank facilities will be required 
during the three-year period and whether 
the Group will remain in compliance with the 
covenants relating to the current facility.

We have modelled a range of scenarios, 
including a central case, a downside 
scenario, a severe but plausible downside 
and a reverse stress test, over the 
three-year horizon. The ‘severe but 
plausible downside’ scenario is conservative 
in assuming, compared to the central case, 
revenue reductions of 10% and gross 
margin reductions at the rate of 2% in  
each of the three years, with no reduction  
in costs. Even under this scenario, and 

before reflecting any mitigating actions 
available to Group management, the 
Group forecasts compliance with all 
financial covenants throughout the 
period and would not require any 
additional sources of financing.

The Group has also modelled a reverse 
stress test scenario. This models the 
decline in sales that the Group would 
be able to absorb before breaching any 
financial covenants. Such a scenario, 
and the sequence of events that could 
lead to it, is considered to be remote, 
as it requires sales reductions of c.15% 
per annum between 2023 and 2025, 
compared to the central case, before 
there is a breach in financial covenants in 
the period under review and is calculated 
before reflecting any mitigating actions.

Even in the severe but plausible 
scenario, Macfarlane Group is forecast 
to have sufficient liquidity to continue 
trading, comfortably meeting its 
financial covenants and operating 
within the level of its facilities for the 
foreseeable future. The reverse stress 
test modelling has shown that a c.27% 
reduction in sales in 2023 compared  
to 2022 could lead to a breach of 
covenants in the period under review. 
However, in this scenario, management 
would also be able to take significant 
mitigating actions to reduces its costs 
and conserve cash.

Conclusions
For this reason, the Board considers it 
appropriate for the Group to adopt the 
going concern basis in preparing its 
financial statements. 

The Board also has a reasonable 
expectation that the Group will 
continue in operation and meet its 
longer-term liabilities as they fall due.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information24 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Principal risks and uncertainties

The principal risks and uncertainties 
faced by the Group and the factors 
mitigating these risks are detailed  
on pages 24 to 28. These risks are 
addressed within an overall 
governance framework including 
clear and delegated authorities, 
business performance monitoring 
and appropriate insurance cover for  
a wide range of potential risks. There 
is a dependence on good quality local 
management, which is supported  
by an investment in training and 
development and ongoing 
performance evaluation.

Risks are identified and assessed 
through a range of ‘top down’ and 
‘bottom up’ analyses that are updated 

on a regular basis. This in turn provides  
the basis for making informed risk-based 
decisions regarding the scope and focus 
of assurance work, as described in the 
report of the Audit Committee on page 
69. In addition to scheduled updates  
from Finance, Health & Safety, IT, Sales, 
Procurement and other business 
functions, the Board and Audit Committee 
may seek assurance work in other areas 
from time to time, either from internal 
sources or externally commissioned work.

We continue to evolve our risk 
management processes to ensure they 
are robust, effective and integrated within 
our decision-making processes. We have 
included a brief description of how we 
assess that each risk level has changed. 

 the risk level is 

For risks shown as 
broadly similar between 2021 and 2022.  
If the risk is shown as 
 the risk level 
has increased or decreased respectively 
during 2022 and is being addressed 
accordingly through mitigating actions  
by management.

The business has added the Uncertain 
Economic Environment as a new risk  
in 2022. Due to a range of prolonged 
geopolitical and economic uncertainties 
within the UK and other markets, there  
is an increased risk that we are entering 
into a recessionary trading environment. 

Risk governance framework

Strategic
planning and 
budgeting 
process

Divisional
and functional
risk registers

Corporate
risk register

Principal 
risks and 
uncertainties

Assurance
work

Strategic changes in the market

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

Failure to respond to strategic shifts  
in the market, including the impact of 
weaknesses in the economy as well as 
disruptive behaviour from competitors 
and changing customer needs (e.g. the 
move towards online retail) could limit 
the Group’s ability to continue to  
grow revenues.

We monitor this through Net Promoter 
Score (see Sustainability Report page 
44), an annual customer satisfaction 
survey (see Sustainability Report page 
44) and interaction with customers at  
our Innovation Lab.

•  The Group has a well-diversified customer 
base giving protection from changes in 
specific industry sectors as well as a 
flexible business model with a strong value 
proposition to meet the changing needs  
of customers.

•  The Group strives to maintain high service 
levels for customers ensuring that customer 
needs are met. The Group continues to 
invest in information technology, including 
its new Customer Relationship Management 
System being rolled out across the Group, 
while also enhancing its service offering.
•  The Group maintains strong partnerships 
with key suppliers to ensure that a broad 
range of products is available to respond  
to customers’ requirements, including  
any changes in their environmental and 
sustainability priorities.

•  The Group’s supply chain challenges 

experienced in 2021 have stabilised in 2022 with 
lead times returning to normal levels. However, 
the Group has continued to experience volatility 
in input prices across all product categories 
which is being managed effectively. 
•  During 2022 the Group has experienced 

weaker demand from customers, particularly  
in the e-commerce retail sector.

•  During 2023 the Group expects to realise 

some of the benefits of the new Customer 
Relationship Management system which will 
help the customer service teams in managing 
the complex and changing needs of our 
customers in an increasingly competitive 
environment.

25

Impact of environmental, social and governance (‘ESG’) changes

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

•  The Group has an ESG working group to 
examine specifically how we can reduce 
our impact on the environment. 

•  The working Group is focused on measuring 
the CO2 footprint and setting and monitoring 
progress against reduction targets for 
TCFD (Taskforce for Climate-related 
Financial Disclosures).

•  A full-time Head of Sustainability was 

appointed and started in January 2023.

•  The Group has committed to the 

development of a transition plan towards 
net-zero and, on an ongoing basis, reviews 
all relevant developments and available 
technologies to support that transition.

•  Regular reviews of our environmental 
strategy are carried out at Board level  
to challenge performance against key 
milestones, as well as to ensure that priorities 
are aligned with stakeholder objectives.

•  The Group recognises the increased 

significance of our ESG obligations. Our 
plans include actions to reduce our own 
carbon footprint, including;

  –  the introduction of electric trucks to our 

fleet in 2022/2023;

  –  investment in solar panels at sites with 

high energy use; and

  –  ongoing actions to support our customers 

to reduce their CO2 emissions, including 
using our ‘Packaging Optimiser’ tool.

•  The Group has actively engaged with 

customers to minimise the impact of the 
Plastic Tax by switching to alternative 
products.

•  See Sustainability Report on pages 33 to 49.

Customers are increasingly focused  
on the environmental impacts of 
packaging, changing their buying 
behaviours in response to climate  
and sustainability concerns. 

Investors are looking to invest in 
companies that demonstrate strong  
ESG credentials. 

There is increasing regulatory focus 
around reporting disclosures and new 
requirements, such as the Plastic Tax 
introduced from April 2022. The Plastic 
Tax cost £0.9m in 2022. This cost is 
recharged directly onto our customers.

If the Group is not proactive and 
transparent in how it is responding  
to environmental changes, this could 
lead to a loss of employees, customers 
and investors.

The key measure the Group monitors  
is Scope 1 and 2 CO2 emissions.

Raw material prices

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

The Group’s businesses are impacted  
by commodity-based raw material prices 
and manufacturer energy costs, with 
profitability sensitive to input price 
changes including currency fluctuations. 

The principal components are 
corrugated paper, polythene films, 
timber and foam, with changes to paper 
and oil prices having a direct impact on 
the price we pay to our suppliers.

This risk is monitored through our 
procurement teams interacting with  
key suppliers and management regularly 
reviewing gross margin by customer.

•  The Group works closely with its supplier 
and customer base to manage effectively 
the scale and timing of price changes  
and any resultant impact on profit.  
Our IT systems monitor and measure 
effectiveness in these changes. 
•  Where possible, alternative supplier 

relationships are maintained to minimise 
supplier dependency. 

•  We work with customers to redesign  

packs and reduce packing cost to mitigate 
the impact of cost increases including 
switching to alternative products to 
minimise the impact of the Plastic Tax 
introduced in April 2022.

•  The Group has a well-established supplier 
relationship management process which  
is subject to periodic management review 
and internal audit.

• 

Input prices have continued to change 
throughout 2022 primarily due to volatility  
in timber, paper and polymer prices and the 
impact of rising fuel and energy costs. The 
business has managed these challenges 
robustly and gross margins have remained 
strong throughout 2022, reflecting the effort 
of our teams to mitigate these increases. 
•  The Group expects input prices to stabilise 
and potentially soften in 2023. However,  
this remains uncertain due to the general 
economic landscape and inflationary 
pressures on suppliers operating costs.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information26 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Principal risks and uncertainties  
(continued)

Acquisitions

Risk description

The Group’s growth strategy has 
included a number of acquisitions in 
recent years. There is a risk that such 
acquisitions may not be available on 
acceptable terms in the future. 

It is possible that acquisitions will not be 
successful due to the loss of key people 
or customers following acquisition or 
acquired businesses not performing  
at the level expected. This could 
potentially lead to impairment of the 
carrying value of the related goodwill 
and other intangible assets. Execution 
risks around the failure to successfully 
integrate acquisitions following 
conclusion of the earn-out period also 
exist. This is monitored through regular 
reporting of acquisition prospects  
and post-acquisition performance by 
executive management, with reporting 
to the Board.

Property

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

•  The Group carefully reviews potential 
acquisition targets, ensuring that the  
focus is on high-quality businesses which 
complement the Group’s existing profile 
and provide good opportunities for growth. 

•  Having completed a number of 

acquisitions in recent years, the Group  
has well-established due diligence and 
integration processes and procedures, 
while only acquiring well-established 
quality businesses which will perform  
well in the Group.

•  The Group’s management information 
system enables effective monitoring  
of post-acquisition performance with 
earn-out mechanisms also mitigating  
risk in the post-acquisition period.
•  Goodwill and other intangible assets  
are tested annually for impairment  
with the results set out in note 10.

•  The Group has made 15 acquisitions  
since 2014, including one in 2022.

•  The acquisition made in 2022 of PackMann, 
based in Germany, was the Group’s first 
investment in Europe. This is inherently a higher 
risk acquisition due to cultural differences and 
less depth in local management expertise and 
support when compared to previous UK-based 
acquisitions. However, there are also important 
strategic opportunities for the Group in terms 
of extending service coverage for existing and 
new customers as well as integration synergies.

•  The Group has a strong pipeline of potential 
protective packaging acquisition opportunities 
in both the UK and Northern Europe.

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

The Group has a property portfolio 
comprising 1 owned site and 48 leased 
sites. This multi-site portfolio gives rise 
to risks in relation to ongoing lease costs, 
dilapidations and fluctuations in value. 

This risk is monitored on a regular basis 
and reported to the Board through 
internal reporting and input from 
external advisors.

•  The Group adopts a proactive approach to 
managing property costs and exposures.
•  Where a site is non-operational the Group 

• 

seeks to assign, sell or sub-lease the 
building to mitigate the financial impact. 
If this is not possible, rental voids are 
provided on vacant properties taking into 
consideration the likely period of vacancy 
and incentives to re-let.

•  The Group engages with external property 
advisers to assess the level of provisioning 
required for dilapidations and negotiate to 
minimise the final costs.

•  Our property consolidation strategy has 

continued during 2022. Work is ongoing to 
finalise exit costs following the expiry of two 
leases and there are known future exits from 
another five existing operating sites. Provisions 
have been established to cover the anticipated 
exit costs (note 21).

•  The Group currently has no vacant or sub-let 

properties.

Cyber-security

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

The increasing frequency and 
sophistication of cyber-attacks is  
a risk which potentially threatens the 
confidentiality, integrity and availability 
of the Group’s data and IT systems.

These attacks could also cause 
reputational damage and fines in  
the event of personal data being 
compromised.

This risk is monitored through an 
ongoing program of compliance and 
controls auditing with input from 
external advisors.

•  The Group continually invests in its IT 

infrastructure to protect against cyber-
security threats. This includes regular 
testing of IT Disaster Recovery Plans.

•  We engage the services of a cyber-security 
partner to perform regular penetration 
tests to assess potential vulnerabilities 
within our security arrangements.
•  This is complemented by a program  
of cyber-security awareness training  
to ensure that all staff are aware of the 
potential threats caused by deliberate  
and unauthorised attempts to gain  
access to our systems and data.

•  Remote working practices are the norm, with 

the Group adopting hybrid home/office flexibility 
for its employees. This is a feature within the 
Group’s risk to cyber-security attacks.

•  The Group continues to invest in prevention/

detection software and education programmes 
to mitigate the risks of cyber-security attacks.

•  The frequency and sophistication of cyber-
attacks is anticipated to continue to evolve, 
and the Group is committed to continually 
investing in upgrading its’ infrastructure to 
respond to the changing threats.

27

Financial liquidity, debt covenants and interest rates

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

The Group needs continuous access to 
funding to meet its trading obligations 
and to support organic growth and 
acquisitions. There is a risk that the 
Group may be unable to obtain funds 
and that such funds will only be available 
on unfavourable terms.

The Group’s borrowing facility 
comprises a committed facility of up  
to £30m. This includes requirements  
to comply with specified covenants, 
with a breach potentially resulting in 
Group borrowings being subject to 
more onerous conditions.

•  The Group’s borrowing facility comprises  
a committed facility of £30m with Lloyds 
Bank PLC, which finances our trading 
requirements and supports controlled 
expansion, providing a medium-term 
funding platform for growth.

•  The Group regularly monitors net bank 
debt and forecast cash flows to ensure 
that it will be able to meet its financial 
obligations as they fall due.

•  Compliance with covenants is monitored 
on a monthly basis and sensitivity analysis 
is applied to forecasts to assess the impact 
on covenant compliance.

• 

•  The Group has proved to be strongly cash 
generative in 2022 and has operated well 
within its existing bank facilities throughout 
the year.
Interest rates have increased from 2.00% at 
31 December 2021 to 5.25% at 31 December 
2022 and are expected to increase further in 
2023. The increase in rates, which are in line 
with the market, do not increase the risk of 
the Group being unable to obtain funds and 
the Group operates well within the specific 
covenant related to interest i.e. 3 times 
EBITDA to interest.

Working capital

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

The Group has a significant investment 
in working capital in the form of  
trade receivables and inventories. 
There is a risk that this investment  
is not fully recovered.

This risk is monitored through detailed 
reporting to local and executive 
management, which is reviewed  
in summary form by the Board.

•  Credit risk is controlled by applying rigour 
to the management of trade receivables  
by Head of Credit Control and the credit 
control team and is subject to additional 
scrutiny from the Group Finance Director 
and Group Financial Controller in line with 
the Group’s credit risk process.
•  All aged debts are assessed using  
the Expected Credit Loss model,  
and appropriate provisions are made.
•  Customers in sectors likely be significantly 

impacted by the current economic 
challenges, particularly those exposed to 
reduced consumer demand and significant 
increases in operating costs e.g. energy, 
fuel etc are closely monitored and where 
necessary actions taken to reduce exposure 
to potential bad debts or stock write-offs.
Inventory levels and order patterns are 
regularly reviewed and risks arising from 
holding bespoke stocks are managed by 
obtaining order cover from customers.

• 

•  Bad debt write-offs in 2022 have increased 
from 2021, albeit still at a relatively low level. 
This is reflected in the Expected Credit  
Loss allowance being increased accordingly 
(note 14).

•  Aged stock over 6 months old has increased in 
2022 (note 13) due to a slowdown in demand 
particularly from the e-commerce retail 
sector. The Group is working to reduce stock 
over 6 months and has invested in a new IT 
system, Slimstock to support this initiative.
•  The current economic environment is likely 
to increase the risk of bad debts and stock 
write-offs in 2023, although management 
will continue to take all appropriate steps  
to mitigate this risk and limit the need for 
additional provisions or write-offs.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information28 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Principal risks and uncertainties  
(continued)

Defined benefit pension scheme

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

The Group’s defined benefit pension 
scheme is sensitive to a number of key 
factors including investment returns, 
the discount rates used to calculate  
the scheme’s liabilities and mortality 
assumptions.

Small changes in these assumptions 
could cause significant movements  
in the pension surplus/deficit. 

This risk is monitored through regular 
input from external pension advisors, 
including six monthly IAS19 reviews 
and triennial actuarial valuations.

•  The scheme was closed to new members 
in 2002. Benefits for active members were 
amended by freezing pensionable salaries 
at April 2009 levels.

•  A Pension Increase Exchange option is 

available to offer flexibility to new pensioners 
in both the level of pension at retirement 
and the rate of future increases.
•  The investment profile is regularly 

reviewed to ensure continued matching  
of investments with the scheme’s  
liability profile.

•  The scheme invests in Liability Driven 
Investments (‘LDI’) which hedge the 
scheme against movements in the 
discount rate and inflation. These are 
leveraged instruments which require 
active investments and divestments  
to maintain the level of leverage.
•  The scheme was closed to future  

accrual during 2022.

•  The IAS 19 valuation of the Group’s defined 
benefit pension scheme as at 31 December 
2022 estimated the scheme surplus to be 
£10.2m, compared to a surplus of £8.3m  
at 31 December 2021. 

•  Deficit repair contributions were set at £1.3m 
per annum following the triennial actuarial 
valuation at 1 May 2020. The Group is 
committed to making these contributions 
until May 2024.

•  The Group paid £0.7m into the scheme in 2022 
to satisfy the debt agreed with the trustees in 
relation to the cessation of Macfarlane Labels 
Limited as a sponsoring employer.

•  2022 saw unprecedented levels of volatility  

in gilt markets. Longer dated yields rose from 
approximately 1.6% at the beginning of the 
year to 4.3% at the recent peak. Whilst this 
significantly decreased the schemes liabilities it 
required additional collateral payments into the 
LDIs to preserve the hedging the LDIs provide 
against movements in interest and inflation. 
The leverage on the LDIs was also lowered to 
reduce the likelihood of collateral calls from 
the scheme’s LDI manager.

Uncertain economic environment

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

Due to a range of prolonged geopolitical 
and economic uncertainties within the 
UK and other markets, there is an 
increased risk that we are entering into 
a challenging trading environment. If 
this materialises, the length and depth 
of such an environment is unknown  
and may adversely affect our ability  
to deliver upon agreed strategic 
initiatives. We may also need to adapt 
our business quickly in order to limit 
the impact upon the Group’s results, 
prospects and reputation.

This risk is monitored through regular 
review of trading forecasts and market 
conditions, considered at executive 
management and Board level.

•  A twice yearly viability assessment  

and sensitivity analyses is performed  
by management.

•  The Group’s borrowing facility comprises a 
committed facility of £30m with Lloyds Bank 
PLC, which finances our trading requirements 
and supports controlled expansion, providing 
a medium-term funding platform for growth. 

•  The Group regularly monitors net bank 
debt and forecast cash flows to ensure 
that it will be able to meet its financial 
obligations as they fall due.

•  Compliance with covenants is monitored 
on a monthly basis and sensitivity analysis 
is applied to forecasts to assess the impact 
on covenant compliance.

•  The Group has scope to curtail capital 

• 

expenditure and acquisition investment  
to preserve cash, if required.
In the event of a significant reduction in 
customer demand the Group would take 
rigorous actions to reduce operating costs 
and working capital investment.

New risk in 2022

• 

It is predicted that the UK economy will 
experience a challenging economic 
environment during 2023.

•  The Group could potentially experience a 

reduction in demand for its products in 2023 if 
the impact of rising costs of living and interest 
rates slows down the economy.

•  The Group is experiencing rising operating 

costs particularly, energy, fuel and employee 
costs and increased interest rates.

•  To mitigate this risk, executive management 

monitors monthly revenue and cost 
performance and market trends closely, and 
has detailed action plans to respond to any 
significant or prolonged trading pressures.

There are a number of other risks that we manage which are not considered key risks.  
These are mitigated in ways common to all businesses and not specific to Macfarlane Group.

Stakeholder engagement s172 statement

29

The Board and its individual Directors 
consider that they have acted in good 
faith in the manner that is most likely  
to promote the success of Macfarlane 
Group for the benefit of its members as a 
whole and have done so having regard to 
the stakeholders and matters set out in 
Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006.

There is a recognition by the Directors 
that they are not expected to balance the 
interests of the members of Macfarlane 
Group against those of other stakeholders 
but rather, after considering all relevant 
factors, to decide on the actions which will 
best lead to success for the Group having 
regard to the long term. Decisions may not 
affect all stakeholders equally. Depending 
on the particular matter requiring Board 
decision, this can mean that certain 
Stakeholder Groups may be inadvertently 
adversely affected, but this will not of itself 
call into question the decisions made.

Given the listed status of the Group and 
the nature of its operational activities,  
the Directors view the key Stakeholders 
Groups and means of engagement as 
shown on the right.

Customers
Principal methods of engagement
Teams at all our locations interact with 
our existing and potential customers in 
the Local, Core and National customer 
groups on a daily basis to understand 
and fulfil their product and service 
requirements. Using our ‘Significant 
Six’ sales approach, we work with our 
customers to optimise their packaging 
requirements from both a value and 
sustainability perspective.

Suppliers
Principal methods of engagement
Our procurement teams and employees 
at all our locations interact with both our 
strategic and operating suppliers on  
a daily basis to ensure that the supply 
chain is robust and that the trading 
relationships with suppliers continue to 
operate well. The Group pays suppliers 
in line with agreed credit terms.

Community
(Our trading locations and the impact of 
our activities on the local environment)

Principal methods of engagement
We operate from good quality facilities 
throughout the UK and in our European 
locations and deliver to customers 
using our own fleet of trucks, driven by 
our drivers. We act in a manner intended 
to recognise and reduce any adverse 
impact on our local environments in 
terms of the types of product supplied, 
usage of energy and CO2 emissions. 
We employ people from the local areas 
of each of our businesses and invest  
in their training and development.

Shareholders
Principal methods of engagement
Members of the Board engage with 
shareholders throughout the year at events 
such as the Annual General Meeting, the 
results roadshows and Capital Markets 
days. Our Chair also consults with major 
shareholders each year. These meetings 
give shareholders a number of 
opportunities to raise concerns. 
Presentations to Shareholders are also 
shared on the www.macfarlanegroup.com 
website. The key areas discussed with 
shareholders in 2022 included reviews  
of business performance with a focus on 
sales growth, operating margins and cash 
flows, progress on acquisitions, review  
of the Group’s strategy and resilience of 
the business model given the economic 
uncertainties and inflationary environment.

Employees
Principal methods of engagement
The Board normally holds at least two of 
its meetings at different Group locations. 
This provides the opportunity to engage 
with the local teams and hear their views 
on working within Macfarlane Group. In 
addition, employee representatives are 
invited to all Board meetings to engage 
with the Board on issues affecting 
employees, including Health & Safety and 
wellbeing. In addition, Executive Board 
members hold regular communication 
meetings with teams across the Group  
to provide an update on key issues and 
discuss any concerns.

Pension members
Principal methods of engagement
The Group Finance Director attends all 
Trustee Board meetings of the Macfarlane 
Group PLC Pension & Life Assurance 
Scheme (1974) and works with the Board of 
Trustees to ensure the pension scheme is 
funded in line with UK pension legislation 
to meet our commitments to over 550 
current and former employees who are 
members. Feedback from each of these 
meetings is provided to the Board for 
consideration of any actions required in the 
interests of pension scheme members.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information30 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Stakeholder engagement s172 statement
(continued)

In all cases, these engagement  
actions help to keep the Board 
informed throughout the year in 
relation to stakeholder concerns and 
priorities such that, where appropriate, 
they can be taken into account within  
the Board’s decision-making.

We expect our people to act with the 
highest level of integrity in dealing with 
all stakeholders. We operate a suite  
of policies intended to ensure that 
Macfarlane Group employees are 
empowered to make decisions locally 
that are aligned with those values but 
within a control framework which 
meets Group objectives.

The Board uses its regular meetings  
as a mechanism to address and meet 
its obligations under Section 172 of  
the Companies Act 2006. The following 
narrative covers the key decisions made 
during the year and the Stakeholder 
Groups impacted by those decisions.

Board decision:
Strategy and performance

Strategy stakeholder  
group engagement

Performance stakeholder  
group engagement

Shareholders
Employees
Customers
Suppliers
Community

The Board reviews the Group’s strategic 
direction and growth plans during each 
calendar year. In doing so, it considers the 
position of its key Stakeholder Groups.

In 2022, the Board approved the acquisition 
of PackMann as part of the Group’s growth 
strategy. The Board concluded that the 
business had a similar customer and 
business approach to Macfarlane and 
would be a good strategic fit, providing 
the Group with a strong platform to grow 
its packaging distribution presence in 
Northern Europe for the benefit of both 
local European markets and UK-based 
customers requiring international 
coverage. As such, the Board concluded 
that the acquisition was in the interests of 
suppliers, customers and employees of 
both the Group and the acquired business.

Each year the Board reviews and approves 
Corporate Defence documents designed 
to protect the value of Macfarlane Group 
and the interests of stakeholders in the 
event of an unexpected approach.

Shareholders
Employees
Customers
Suppliers

The Board approves the annual budget  
for the forthcoming year at its December 
meeting.

The Board reviews the trading 
performance of the business throughout 
the year, monitoring performance against 
the agreed budget and the previous 
financial year.

At each meeting the Board receives 
reports from the Chief Executive and the 
Finance Director. These reports cover 
trading performance, relationships with 
key customers and suppliers as well as 
aspects of operational performance and 
the impact on our employees. The reports 
also give the Board visibility of the up to 
date trading terms with both customers 
and suppliers.

The activities of our competitors are 
reviewed, along with any potential impact 
on the Group and its stakeholders.

The Board approves all location moves, 
including property exits as well as the 
terms of new property arrangements,  
in order to ensure that these are aligned 
with the interests of all stakeholders and 
provide sustainable solutions for the long 
term success of the Group. In 2022, the 
Board approved the exit from property 
leases in Leicester, Nottingham and 
Grantham in 2023 to move to a new larger 
property in Nottingham to support the 
growth of the business in East Midlands. 
The new Nottingham lease is being 
negotiated for a period of twenty years 
with a break clause after ten years.

31

Board decision:
Financing

Board decision:
Risk

Stakeholder group engagement

Stakeholder group engagement

Shareholders
Employees
Pension members
Customers
Suppliers
Community

The Board reviews and monitors the 
Company’s internal control framework 
ensuring regular updating risk registers 
of the Group and the relevant business. 
In doing so, it considers the effectiveness 
of the risk management and internal 
control systems in terms of the 
objective of providing reasonable but 
not absolute assurance against material 
misstatement relative to the interests  
of relevant stakeholders. 

The Board regularly reviews the  
Group’s risk register, ensuring that, 
where appropriate and practical, there 
are appropriate monitoring procedures, 
mitigating controls and actions in 
respect of each major risk. This includes  
a formal consideration of emerging risks.

The Board receives a Health and Safety 
status report at every meeting as well 
as an annual presentation from the 
Group’s Health & Safety Manager which 
covers the impact on our employees, 
our sites and our local environment.

The Audit Committee confirms to the 
Board that the Internal Audit Plan has 
been completed and that all internal 
audit reports have been considered 
and action taken where necessary.

and inflation hedging protections the 
LDIs provide the pension scheme. The 
Board considered expert advice from 
the pension scheme’s investment adviser 
and supported the actions being taken 
to re-allocate funds from existing growth 
assets held by the pension scheme to 
the LDIs to ensure the scheme maintains 
appropriate hedging protection. This 
decision was taken in the interests of  
the scheme’s pensioners and the 
shareholders of the Group. 

The Board considers and approves any 
items of capital expenditure with a value 
in excess of £100,000 and contracts 
which commit the Group to annual 
operational expenditure in excess of 
£250,000. During 2022 the major capital 
expenditure approved at a cost of 
£3,475,000 included six commercial 
vehicles, IT equipment for remote 
working, an Innovation Centre at the 
new North West property, costs of 
fitting out the new East Midlands 
property and solar panels at the 
Grantham manufacturing facility. The 
significant contracts approved during 
2022 were related to the continued 
upgrading of the Group’s cyber security 
defences and the renewal and upgrade 
of the Group’s wide area network and 
printer infrastructure. Major capital 
allocation decisions are a matter reserved 
for the Board, which considers the 
interests of all relevant Stakeholder 
Groups prior to approval.

Shareholders
Employees
Pension members
Customers
Suppliers
Community

The Board approves the terms and 
conditions attaching to the Group’s  
major banking arrangement and receives 
regular reports confirming compliance 
with bank covenants. This provides 
assurance regarding the ability of the 
Group to continue to operate for the 
foreseeable future in the interests  
of all stakeholder groups.

The Board approves the payment of 
dividends to shareholders, taking into 
account distributable reserves and likely 
cash flows and the level of dividends 
relative to other financing requirements.  
In doing so, the Board considers the 
financing and free cashflows available  
to maintain its operations, to continue  
to meet its obligations to its employees 
and members of its pension scheme  
and to fulfil its strategic objectives in  
the interests of all stakeholders.

At the conclusion of each triennial 
actuarial valuation of the pension scheme 
surplus/deficit, the Board approves the 
contributions being proposed under the 
recovery plan for any deficit and ensures 
that these are within the financing and 
cashflow capacities of the Group. During 
2022, the Board approved the additional 
contribution of £700,000 made to the 
pension scheme to satisfy the debt 
agreed with the trustees in relation to  
the cessation of Macfarlane Labels 
Limited as a sponsoring employer. In 
addition, the Board held an unscheduled 
meeting in the year to consider the impact  
of the significant rise in gilt yields, 
following the mini-budget in September 
2022, on the Liability Driven Investments 
(‘LDIs’) held by the pension scheme and 
actions required to maintain the interest 

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information32 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Stakeholder engagement s172 statement
(continued)

Board decision:
Culture and organisation

Board decision:
Environment

Stakeholder group engagement

Stakeholder group engagement

Shareholders
Employees

Community

The Board seeks to satisfy itself that the 
Group’s policies and practices for staff are 
consistent with the Company’s values and 
are designed to promote the long-term 
success of the Group with appropriate 
regard to all stakeholders.

The Remuneration Committee reviews  
the remuneration packages for the 
Executive Directors and the Chief 
Executive’s key reports each year. The 
Board reviews annual pay increases for 
Executive Directors each year, ensuring 
these are appropriate relative to the wider 
employee group.

The Board reviews and approves the 
Group’s Gender Pay reports each year.

The Board receives a report from the  
HR Director each year covering key 
employee matters and developments. 
This report covers the results of our 
annual Employee Survey.

The Board recognises that the largest 
contributor to the Group’s CO2 footprint 
(71%) is the operation of its commercial 
vehicles used to deliver product to its 
customers. The Board is committed  
to the gradual electrification of its 
commercial vehicles fleet as technology 
advances and infrastructure provision 
make this a realistic and practical option 
for our logistical needs, taking delivery  
of one new electric commercial vehicle  
in 2022 and a further four in 2023. 

The Board is also committed to reducing 
the Group’s energy consumption. During 
2022 the Board approved investment in 
solar panels at the manufacturing site in 
Grantham, the site that consumes most 
electricity in the Group, to eliminate the 
need to purchase electricity from external 
providers and reduce the ongoing operating 
cost of the Manufacturing Operations. 

As technology improves, the Group will 
progressively manage the risk and cost  
of advancing the Group’s sustainability 
strategies, thereby serving the interests 
of both financial and wider stakeholders  
in the Group.

Board decision:
Governance and  
legal requirements

Stakeholder group engagement

Shareholders
Employees

The Board conducts an annual review of 
its effectiveness and the effectiveness 
of the Board Committees, including 
the adequacy of its decision-making 
processes with regard to key 
Stakeholder Groups.

The Board considers current and future 
Board composition, with a focus on all 
forms of diversity and Board capability 
and reviews succession planning for 
both Executive and Non-Executive 
Directors to ensure orderly succession.

The Board reviews the Annual  
Report, confirming that, in its view,  
the Annual Report is fair, balanced  
and understandable and provides the 
information necessary for shareholders 
and other stakeholders to assess the 
Group’s performance, business model 
and strategy.

The Board reviews and satisfies itself 
with all other trading updates, including 
the AGM statement, the half-year 
report and trading update in the final 
quarter of the year.

The Board accepted the Audit 
Committee’s recommendation to 
re-appoint Deloitte LLP as external 
auditor in 2022.

TCFD report

33

Introduction
In line with the listing rules for premium 
listed companies, the Group reports on  
its compliance with the Task Force on 
Climate-related Financial Disclosures 
(‘TCFD’). This report sets out the  
climate-related financial disclosures  
for the Group in 2022. 

The Group is fully committed to the 
adoption of the TCFD’s proposals, and  
we are keen to demonstrate to investors 
and wider stakeholders our clear focus  
on climate change. The report below sets 
out our progress in each of the four key 
TCFD reporting areas:

Strategy
In developing its strategy, Macfarlane 
Group recognises that the future trading 
landscape could look very different as 
climate change, including extreme weather 
events, becomes an increasingly important 
factor. Additionally, the customers we 
serve are making choices towards using 
less packaging where possible, as well  
as selecting packaging that is more 
environmentally friendly.

As the leading protective packaging 
distributor in the UK, we have a responsibility 
to support our customers to make an 
informed choice about their packaging 
requirements, enabling them to achieve 
their sustainability objectives and meet the 
needs of their end-customers. The support 
we provide covers several areas:

•  The main role of protective packaging is 
to reduce product damage during both 
storage and delivery. Product damage 
and returns create additional, avoidable 
carbon emissions. Therefore minimising 
product damage is critical in the design 
and manufacturing service we provide 
to our customers.

•  We design packaging with the objective 
of minimising the amount of packaging 
materials employed and we achieve this 
by ensuring the protective packaging 
we sell is fit for purpose and ‘right-sized’ 
for its contents, in order to effectively 
transport and protect the contents.

•  Our designs prioritise the use of 

recycled materials and, where possible, 
the used pack can also be recycled.
•  In addition to ensuring the pack design 
is environmentally friendly, we have a 
Packaging Optimiser tool that allows us 
to help reduce the carbon footprint of 
our customers in areas such as logistics, 
warehousing, and operations. 

Macfarlane Group is principally a 
distribution business and as such is 
strategically positioned to provide our 
customers with independent, unbiased 
advice. We can help them to make 
informed choices on pack designs, the 
most environmentally friendly materials 
and to work with manufacturing partners 
who themselves operate to a strong 
environmental agenda. An example of this 
in 2022 has been with the introduction of 
the Plastics Packaging Tax (‘PPT’), which 
enabled us to persuade customers to 
switch to more environmentally friendly 
plastic products that did not incur the new 
tax. In 2022, 77% of our customer spend 
on products that attracted the Plastic 
Packaging Tax has been switched to plastic 
products with a recycled content over 30%.

The risks in working with our customers  
to support their sustainability objectives 
are that we do not move fast enough for 
the market, or that we move too fast and 
alienate sections of the market. With our 
position in the market, it is vital that we 
obtain the right balance, demonstrating 
our environmental credentials by offering 
customers an informed choice for their 
protective packaging while continuing  
to meet their needs.

Macfarlane Group’s exposure  
to climate change
We believe our business model is highly 
resilient to climate change. With our flexible 
property footprint as a consequence of 
operating from leased facilities, as well as 
the ability to select the suppliers with which 
we partner, we have a strong base from 
which to offer customers an informed 
choice over the best protective packaging 
to suit their environmental goals. 

•  We have Innovation Labs (second 
one opening in 2023) where we 
design bespoke packaging that adds 
value to the customer, and their end 
consumers – whilst also satisfying 
carbon reduction goals. We also  
use the Innovation Labs to help  
our customers reduce their carbon 
footprint through improved vehicle 
utilisation and more effective 
management of warehouse space.
•  We operate our own vehicle fleet using 
route optimisation software that 
ensures we minimise the miles driven 
and carbon used for all deliveries. 
•  We have commenced a programme 
to replace our diesel vehicle fleet 
with electric vehicles in line with the 
planned technological advancements 
in electric vehicle design.

•  Our financial planning considers key 
initiatives and investment required  
in sustainability to meet our CO2 
reduction targets. An example of this 
in 2022 is the approval of the solar 
panels project at our Grantham 
manufacturing site.

•  Our risk management process has 
highlighted both intermediate and 
longer-term risks relating to climate 
change. This includes the location  
of our distribution centres, such as 
those which may be more likely to 
suffer extreme weather events such 
as flooding. This occurred at our 
former distribution centre in Wigan 
in 2022, before the end of our lease 
at that site. In 2022, the Board 
considered future environmental 
‘scenarios’ for the first time as part  
of our strategic process. This gives 
us a framework to consider moving 
forward into 2023.

In 2022, we have provided statistics for 
the first time on the % of our sales that 
relates to products that are recyclable, 
as well as products that already contain 
at least 30% recycled content, as per 
the Environmental, Social and 
Governance (‘ESG’) section of this 
report on pages 36 to 49. This is a 
specific initiative that we will continue 
in 2023, to help us achieve our target  
of 90% for both categories by 2025. 

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information34 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

TCFD report
(continued)

Governance 
The Board has taken the view that 
climate change could have a significant 
impact on the operations of the 
business. This applies both to the 
current period, where stakeholders  
are increasingly aware of this issue, and 
longer term should extreme weather 
events increase in frequency and 
regulatory requirements increase  
in scope and effect. 

•  ESG is now a standing item on  

the Board agenda, providing the 
framework to discuss sustainability 
issues at each meeting – including 
factoring in these considerations 
into major decisions. On top of the 
decision to approve 5 electric trucks 
in 2021, the solar panels project at 
Grantham was also approved in 
2022. These are clear commitments 
that have been subjected to Board 
scrutiny to ensure they are the right 
way forward for the business in 
balancing commercial objectives 
with our climate goals.

•  The Board considers the reporting of 
the Company’s CO2 emissions to be 
fair, balanced and understandable. 
As a growing company with an 
acquisitive strategy, it is appropriate 
that we continue to assess our 
carbon emissions on a volume basis. 
In future this will be based on the 
tonnage of our sales, rather than 
sales revenue. This is the best way  
to measure our progress, as it takes 
away external factors such as 
material price inflation from the 
calculation. This also enables 
consistency of reporting when 
assessing progress towards our 
2030 target of a reduction of 30%  
in carbon intensity. 

•  The executive sponsor for ESG is the 
Company Secretary. In 2022, a Head 
of Sustainability was recruited and 
started in January 2023. This role 
reports to the Company Secretary 
and will provide regular updates to the 
Board on sustainability. Our existing 
ESG committee has a broad range of 

leaders from a wide spectrum of the 
business, including sales, procurement, 
operations and HR. This committee  
has responsibility for developing the 
sustainability strategy of the Group,  
as well as promoting sustainability 
throughout the Group.

•  In 2023, the Board will continue to 
ensure it has the right skills and 
expertise on climate related matters 
– using external input where appropriate 
to bolster the existing personnel. The 
Board will continue to report against 
TCFD on a regular basis, providing 
updates on progress made towards our 
goal of a CO2 per tonne reduction of 
30% by 2030. From this report onwards, 
data will also be provided on an annual 
basis in relation to the recyclability of 
our product range, and percentage of 
products that contain at least 30% 
recycled content. 

Risk management 
Macfarlane has a robust approach to Risk 
Management, as outlined in the Principal 
Risks and Uncertainties section on pages 
24 to 28 and the Governance section on 
pages 65 to 73.

•  In 2022, the Board continued discussion 
and oversight in relation to our corporate 
risk on sustainability. This risk highlights 
the environmental challenge faced by the 
Group, both in the intermediate period 
and longer-term horizon, including  
that of losing market share due to our 
environmental credentials not being 
perceived favourably or even by moving 
too fast in this area. This transition risk 
reflects the risk of significant market 
and regulatory change as a result of 
sustainability issues.

•  There is also the risk of an increased 

frequency of extreme weather events 
affecting the operations at our sites. 
This transition risk and physical risk  
are only increasing in likelihood and 
consequently will be subject to regular 
review by the Board throughout 2023. 
This risk is also considered for any  
new sites as part of our property 
consolidation projects.

•  Climate change risk ties in with other 
risks faced by the business that could 
result in overall loss of market share. 
The risk is inclusive, as it embraces 
reputational risk from a perception of 
‘not doing enough’ in this area, as well as 
pressure from shareholders, customers 
and end-consumers alike. The risk will 
be considered along with other key 
corporate risks on a rolling basis in 2023 
as part of the regular Board agenda. 

The Board typically considers a 5-10 year 
horizon when approaching environmental 
risk. Whilst the risk certainly will sustain 
well beyond this, it is important in 
reinforcing our requirement to act in the 
short and intermediate term or risk the 
consequences from acting too late.

In line with the core Group value of 
integrity, our focus is on what clear 
actions we can take in the next period  
to 2030. Therefore, we have set our 
reduction target for 2030 with a clear plan 
in place on how to achieve the reduction. 
While the Board fully supports the 
ultimate achievement of Net-Zero carbon 
emissions, at present no firm target is in 
place on when this will be achieved. This  
is because any such plan is inevitably 
dependent on technological advances, 
infrastructure provision and other factors 
in the external environment which are 
outwith our control. It is not in our nature 
to set vague or distant targets without a 
clear plan on how they can be achieved. 

Our 2030 target will require significant 
change and investment. Only once  
our electric truck program is further 
developed and demonstrating success, 
would we look to consider a realistic 
timetable/investment level to be able  
to make a Net-Zero commitment. 

Over the longer-term, we consider our 
business to be resilient and viable in a 
situation where global temperatures have 
risen 2 degrees or more. The key to this is 
the flexibility of our geographic footprint, 
through our leased facilities – as well as 
our strategic partnerships with suppliers 
which allows us to operate flexibly with  
our customers as their needs change. 

Metrics and targets 
Following the detailed review conducted  
in 2021, no further changes have been 
made to our metrics and targets in 2022. 
As the leading UK packaging distributor, 
we believe that making investments  
to reduce our own carbon footprint 
complements our business model and 
strategy by ensuring we continue to 
operate with strong and demonstrable 
sustainability credentials.

The Group has used external expertise 
from ‘EcoAct’ in capturing our carbon 
emissions for the year. This year, we 
introduced the first fully electric 16 tonne 
truck to our fleet, in partnership with 
Renault. We plan to work closely with 
them, providing data and feedback on  
its performance. This could lay the 
foundation for a future partnership  
in a more extended and faster roll-out  
of electric trucks into our fleet.

The methodology behind the metrics is  
in line with other companies in the sector, 
with CO2 per tonne deemed the most 
appropriate measure to capture the 
planned reductions. In 2022, we also 
added an environmental objective into the 
Annual Bonus Programme of the senior 
management team. This has helped to get 
buy-in for our sustainability strategy, and 
reinforces that real actions and progress 
are expected in the intermediate period, 
rather than just talking about green 
initiatives. At present we have chosen  
to focus on Scope 1 and 2 CO2, being the 
direct emissions that we can fully control. 
As we continue to make progress and 
embed these changes, we will increasingly 
look at how we can influence Scope 3 
emissions that are emitted outside our 
organisational boundary, working with our 
suppliers and customers to drive further 
material carbon reductions.

1. Our carbon footprint
Our own direct (Scope 1 and 2) carbon 
footprint is the first important metric for 
us to track. Following a detailed review of 
our carbon emissions, the following target 
was set in 2021:

•  By 2030, we will have reduced our CO2 

per tonne of sales by 30%.

This target is greatly dependent on 
further advances in battery technology 
used in electric trucks, given this currently 
comprises two thirds of our carbon 
footprint. The Board’s policy is to keep the 
target under review, and to be prepared  
to increase target reduction where this is 
facilitated by transition in operating cost 
reductions and advances in technology.

2. Our products
As a packaging distributor, we believe  
the products we sell and their usage by 
our customers is a key element of our 
environmental strategy. Therefore, the 
aim is to reduce the number of products 
we sell that are currently not recycled, or 
have less than 30% recycled content. By 
2025, we aim to have 90% of our products 
containing at least 30% recycled content, 
and we will report on progress annually. 
We will also include a report annually of 
how we have reduced the CO2 of our 
customers operations, through more 
efficient packaging usage and materials.

3. Other carbon targets
•  We aim to have all of our sites FSC 
certified by 2025 (currently 85%).  
From 2025-2030, the focus will shift  
to specific product FSC certification.
•  By 2025, 100% of our energy will come 
from renewable sources (currently 88%, 
up from 67% in 2021).

35

4. Other Natural Resources
i) Water
Our business model requires very little 
water usage, given our relatively small 
manufacturing footprint compared  
to our distribution business. This is  
a balance we will seek to maintain, 
therefore keeping our water usage  
low is of paramount importance in our 
strategy and business model. In 2022 
all sites were assessed for water stress, 
with no high-risk sites being identified. 
The Group’s four manufacturing sites, 
which have higher water usage, have 
processes in place to reduce usage 
where possible.

ii) Waste
Currently 99% of our waste avoids 
landfill – we plan to maintain this and 
increase to 100% by 2030, as well as 
continue to promote our recycling arm 
as an option for customers. Monitoring 
of waste streams to maximise 
segregation and recycling rates.

iii) Land-use
Our use of land is limited to the running 
of warehouses close to our customers, 
geographically spread across the UK, 
Ireland, Germany and further 
expanding into mainland Europe. The 
flexibility of leased facilities means we 
do not require any significant alteration 
of the premises/land where we do 
business. We plan to maintain this 
operating model, with limited usage  
of natural resources.

Summary
Overall, 2022 has been a further year  
of progress against the main TCFD 
initiatives. Highlights of the year have 
included: the appointment of a Head  
of Sustainability starting January 2023; 
the introduction to our delivery fleet of 
an electric vehicle; approval of our solar 
panels project at Grantham; as well as 
our first incorporation of scenario 
planning into our strategic processes. 
We remain fully committed to our goal 
of a 30% reduction in CO2 per tonne  
of goods sold. Further detail on this 
and other environmental targets can 
be found in the ESG section of our 
Sustainability Report on pages 36 to 49.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information36 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

ESG report

Introduction from our CEO

Throughout the past year at 
Macfarlane Group, we have continued 
to work towards a more sustainable 
and equitable future for our customers, 
colleagues, communities, and 
investors. The targets we have set  
are focussed on reducing our carbon 
emissions, to reduce the Group’s 
impact on the environment, as well as 
supporting our customers to achieve 
their sustainability objectives. In 
addition we continue to work to 
improve our customer engagement 
and provide support for our colleagues 
and the communities we serve.

Highlights of the last 12 months 
include:

• 

• 

• 

• 

 A reduction in our absolute scope 1 
and 2 carbon footprint by 765 tonnes 
from 6,676 to 5,911, an 11% reduction 
as a result of the sale of Macfarlane 
Labels Limited and its subsidiaries 
(‘Labels’) on 31 December 2021  
(628 tonnes or 9%) and efficiency 
improvements in fuel and electricity 
usage (137 tonnes or 2%). 
 88% of our energy usage now comes 
from renewable sources, a significant 
improvement from 2021 (67%).
 The launch of colleague volunteer 
days in the second half of 2022 has 
seen our staff donate 204 hours of 
their time to charitable causes.
 Macfarlane Group has also welcomed 
a partnership with Blue Cross, a 
charity that provides specialist care, 
services and support for pets and 
their owners.

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

 Supporting customers has remained at 
the heart of everything we do and this 
has been reflected in our Net Promotor 
Score, which increased from 48 points 
to 50 in the past 12 months.
 We have re-launched the Packaging 
Optimiser tool which has enabled 
businesses to understand the total cost 
of their packaging operations and the 
impact it is having on the environment. 
This has been instrumental in helping 
our customers improve efficiency and 
minimise carbon emissions.
 Our Significant Six programme  
remains a key aid to help customers 
drive down their emissions associated 
with packaging and will be an important 
tool in the coming months as many 
businesses look to control costs in  
the current economic climate.
 During 2022, the Group’s seventh 
annual unboxing survey, which 
generated over 1,000 respondents, 
further reinforced the need for 
businesses to prioritise sustainability 
when it comes to packaging. 
 We have worked with our customers on 
key legislative changes like the Plastic 
Packaging Tax and updated our product 
portfolio to increase recycled content 
and recyclable protective packaging 
solutions alongside capturing 
environmental attribute data and will 
continue to do so. This positions the 
Group well to prepare ourselves and 
customers for future regulatory 
requirements, such as Extended 
Producer Responsibility.
 We have been awarded a Silver EcoVadis 
rating, as well as making our first ever 
submission to the Carbon Disclosure 
Project (‘CDP’), signalling our 
commitment to continue to reduce  
our environmental impact.

• 

• 

 From a governance perspective,  
we have our first female Chair of 
Macfarlane, following the appointment 
of Aleen Gulvanessian in October 
2022. The addition of Laura Whyte  
as Remuneration Committee Chair  
is also very positive and means 33%  
of our Board Directors are now female. 
 We have appointed a new Head of 
Sustainability, David Patton. David’s 
experience at Zero Waste Scotland 
means he is well placed to drive our 
sustainability strategy.

In the coming year, we will continue  
to implement our ESG strategy.  
I remain confident that in 2023 we will 
make further progress in supporting  
a sustainable future for us all by 
protecting what matters. 

Peter Atkinson 
Chief Executive Officer

How we manage 
Environment, Social  
and Governance (ESG) 
We manage ESG through our ESG 
committee which meets monthly and 
is chaired by our Company Secretary. 
With the appointment of our new  
Head of Sustainability, David Patton,  
he will assume responsibility for this 
Committee in 2023. The Head of 
Sustainability will report directly to  
the Company Secretary. Macfarlane’s 
ESG committee is guided by our core 
values and has clear objectives that 
drive our overall sustainability strategy.

Our ESG committee objectives 
1.  To improve the awareness of ESG 

across the Group.

2.  To develop and implement action 
plans that support the Group’s  
ESG strategy.

3.  To ensure that ESG is an integral  
part of daily operational activities.

4.  To monitor and report on ESG 
performance using agreed key 
performance indicators.

This report will provide an insight into our 
ESG focus areas, highlighting the targets 
and initiatives we are implementing. 
The report is set out into three key 
sections for Environmental; Social;  
and Governance respectively. 

37

Highlights 2022
Environment
•   11.5% or 765 tCO2e absolute reduction in carbon footprint  
in 2022 from 6,676 tCO2e in 2021 to 5,911 tCO2e in 2022.  
628 tCO2e of the reduction related to the Labels business  
sold in December 2021.

•   19.4% improvement in carbon intensity relative to sales value 

from 0.023 to 0.020 (tCO2e per £000 sales).

•   This represents a 12% reduction in absolute carbon footprint 
and a 33% improvement in carbon sales intensity relative to  
the 2019 baseline year.

•   Improvement in our percentage of energy from renewable 

sources from 67% to 88%.

•   First new 16T Electric Truck added to the commercial vehicle 

fleet, paving way for learnings for a future wider rollout.

•   Helping customers move to more environmentally friendly 

products, in lieu of the introduction of the PPT.

•   First submission made to the CDP, outlining our commitment  

to carbon reduction and transparency of our journey.

Social
•   50 – our average Net Promotor Score for 2022 (2021:48).
•   Installed Automatic External Defibrillators (AED’s) in all the  

UK and Ireland Group sites. 

•   Continued our established colleague engagement survey 

programme, obtaining a 57% participation rate which has directed 
areas of focus for improved colleague engagement for 2023. 

•   Launched our new Diversity, Equality and Inclusion Policy, 
including training to 95% of senior managers in the Group  
and the introduction of guides to Discrimination, Bullying, 
Harassment, Sexual Harassment & Victimisation. 

•   Launched our new volunteering initiative (1 paid day per 

colleague per annum), allowing colleagues to give back to the 
community. Alongside this we launched our new partnership 
with Blue Cross, offering direct volunteering opportunities. 

Governance
•    ESG continuing as an established standing agenda item in  

Board meetings.

•   Appointment of first female Chair of Macfarlane Group, with 
Aleen Gulvanessian becoming chair on 1st October 2022.
•   33% of Board Directors now female, with the appointment  

of Laura Whyte as Remuneration Committee Chair.

•   Continued capital investment in ESG, shown by approval of the 
installation of solar panels at our Grantham manufacturing site.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information38 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

ESG report  
(continued)

Environment: helping our customers achieve their 
sustainability goals, whilst reducing our own carbon footprint

Tackling carbon emissions and climate change

Macfarlane currently emits 5,911 
tonnes of carbon (2021: 6,676 tonnes). 
The major sources of carbon emissions 
are fuel from our vehicle fleet (82%) and 
our electricity usage (11%). By 2030 we 
will reduce our scope 1 and 2 carbon 
emissions (CO2e) by at least 30% per 
tonne of products sold compared to 
the base year of 2019. Due to the 
variability of performance in 2021 and 
2020 with the impact of Covid-19 which 
resulted in abnormal trading patterns, 
sales volumes and costs, 2019 is the 
last full year of more typical trading 
conditions. As such, it is deemed to  
be the most appropriate base year  
to compare our performance against.

Macfarlane Group key initiatives to tackle carbon emissions and climate change 

Key goals: 
carbon emissions

Aiming to convert the delivery fleet  
to 50% electric vehicles by 2030. 
The first five electric vehicles will be introduced  
to the fleet in 2022-23. 100% of vehicles of 3.5T 
or under will be electric by 2030. All new vehicles 
have zero emissions. Assuming technology 
develops allowing greater range and payload we 
would expect beyond 2030 to have the majority 
of our fleet converted to electric vehicles. This 
commitment to electric vehicles has been made 
despite a significant cost disadvantage over the 
existing fleet. (Estimated tCO2e saving of 1,500 
tonnes per year).

50% of Company cars will be electric by 2026. 
Macfarlane Group commits to offering Company 
car users more choice of electric vehicles. To 
support all employees using electric vehicles, 
100% of Macfarlane Group sites will have electric 
vehicle charging points by 2030. (Estimated 
tCO2e saving of 180 tonnes per year).

Status

2022 update

On track

•  16T truck received in 

December 2022

•  4 x 4.5T vehicles moved  
to 2023 due to supply  
chain delays from the 
manufacturer

On track

•  As at 2022, 18% (2021: 

13%) of Company cars are 
electric with this expected 
to increase again in 2023

Solar panels to be installed at one site per year, 
saving an average of 20 tonnes of CO2e per site. 
We aim for solar panels to be installed in at least 
10 sites by 2030. (Estimated tCO2e saving of 90 
tonnes per year).

On track

•  Solar Panel capital 

expenditure at Grantham 
manufacturing site 
approved by the Board  
in December 2022 to  
be installed in 2023

With fuel from running our own truck fleet accounting for two thirds of Scope 1 and 2 
carbon emissions, there are several other initiatives in place to help reduce our footprint  
in this area. This includes our driver performance scheme, introduced in 2021, which 
encourages optimal driving behaviour that reduces fuel consumption and emissions. 
This programme makes use of telematics to track speed, braking and acceleration. 

We also have in place our Paragon software and vehicle tracking system, which plans 
our routes to minimise our fuel usage. As this is rolled out to more of our sites, this will  
help reduce our overall emissions and make our fleet as efficient as possible.

39

Mandatory greenhouse gas  
reporting 2022
The Group seeks to minimise the impact of 
our operations on the environment and is 
committed to reducing its greenhouse gas 
(’GHG’) emissions. This report outlines the 
Group’s GHG emissions for 2022. Using an 
operational approach, the Group identified 
its boundaries to ensure all activities and 
facilities for which it is responsible were 
being recorded and reported in line with 
Scope 1 and 2 of the SECR regulation, 
which applies to Company financial years 
starting on or after 1st April 2019. Relevant 
data was provided to an independent 
consultant, EcoAct. The validity, accuracy 
and completeness of the data was audited 
by EcoAct and then used to calculate the 
GHG for Macfarlane Group. Calculations 
were completed in accordance with the 
main requirements of ISO-14064-1 
standard and deliver both absolute values 
and an intensity ratio for the Group’s 
emissions. Activities conducted in the 
Republic of Ireland, the Netherlands and 
Germany are included below to represent 
the Group’s full Scope 1 and 2 footprint. 
Scope 3 emissions tied to business travel 
fuel are included separately as per the 
SECR regulations1.

The Group continues to report on the 
absolute carbon footprint and intensity  
of carbon footprint relative to sales. The 
Group considers an intensity metric to  
be appropriate in light of the Company’s 
ongoing growth plans and acquisition of an 
average of two companies per year. During 
the period work has been undertaken to 
move towards an intensity footprint based 
on tonnage of product produced and 
further work will be undertaken during 
2023 to reflect on the most representative 
measures the organisation can utilise to 
further enhance reporting.

Type of emission Activity

2022 
Units

2021 
Units

2022 
Tonnes 
of CO2e

2021
Tonnes 
of CO2e

Direct  
(Scope 1)

Natural gas (kWh)
Vehicle fuel (litres)
Vehicle fuel (miles)2
Other (litres)

1,395,619
1,779,666
1,044,334
99,386

2,375,152
1,842,699
661,123
120,056

Subtotal

Indirect  
(Scope 2)

Purchased  
electricity (kWh)

Subtotal

Total gross emission (tCO2e)

3,259,944

5,700,248

Total gross GHG emissions (tCO2e)

Total sales (£000)

255
4,547
287
178

5,267

644

644

5,911

435
4,627
182
221

5,465

1,211

1,211

6,676

2022 

2021

5,911

6,676

290,431

285,685

Carbon intensity (based on sales £000, previous measure)

0.0204

0.0234

2022 
Tonnes 
of CO2e

2021 
Tonnes 
of CO2e

2022
Sales 
£000

2021
Sales 
£000

2022
tCO2e/
£000

2021
tCO2e/
£000

4,883

4,949

259,651

239,508

0.0188

0.0207

1,028

1,727

30,780

46,177

0.0333

0.0374

Business segment

Packaging 
Distribution
Manufacturing 
Operations

Total 

5,911

6,676

290,431

285,685

0.0204

0.0234

The tables above includes the Labels division data for 2021, but not 2022. The Labels 
division was sold on 31 December 2021.

CO2e per annum

2022 

2021

2020

2019

Total (Absolute tonnes)

tCO2e (Intensity based on sales)

5,911 

0.020

6,676

0.023

6,786

0.029

6,752

0.030

As the Group is a growing business, we believe it is important to measure our 
environmental performance, specifically carbon reduction, in intensity terms as  
well as absolute terms. The high inflationary environment experienced recently  
has made our sales intensity ratio less meaningful and we therefore plan to move  
to an intensity ratio based on volume of product sold. Work has been undertaken to 
increase the quality of our tonnage data and ensure that we have consistency across 
the Group and we expect to be in a position to start reporting on this from the 2023 
financial year onwards.

1 

2 

 Scope 3 emissions relating to business travel in rental cars or employee owned vehicles where the Group 
purchased the fuel amounted to 14 tonnes of CO2e during 2022.
 Vehicle fuel measured in miles for the prior year has been restated here to reflect the accurate unit of 
measurement (previously presented in litres). Other litres has also been restated for 2021 at the correct 
value of 120,056 litres (previously 50,627 reported). The carbon remains accurate and in line with what 
was previously reported. Truck data is measured in litres, whereas Company cars are measured in miles.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information 
 
40 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

ESG report  
(continued)

Investing in 
sustainable 
distribution

41

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information42 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

ESG report  
(continued)

Protecting natural resources 

Macfarlane Group is taking a range of actions that aim to conserve natural  
resources for future generations. The key actions are as follows:

Status

2022 update

On track

•  As at 31 December 2022 

85%* of sites were certified, 
increasing to 94% by the 
date of this report.

On track

•  88% of our sites at  

31 December 2022 on  
a ‘green’ energy tariff, 
compared to 67% at  
31 December 2021.

Recycling and 
recovery (diversion 
from landfill)

Key goals:  
protecting natural resources

100% of Group sites will be FSC® certified 
(FSC® – C149407) by the end of 2025. 
This gives us the ability to source all paper and 
timber products from sustainably managed 
forestry. At the end of 2021, we had 80% of 
sites that were FSC certified.

We aim to have 100% of our energy coming 
from renewable sources by 2025. 
The Group purchases green energy via 
renewable tariffs certified through a REGO 
(Renewable Energy Guarantees of Origin) –  
we are committed to promoting green energy 
and reducing our overall energy usage.
Our goal includes all sites where we have full 
control over energy sources. Where possible, 
we also work with landlords to promote 
renewable energy. 

* First year reporting therefore no prior year comparative.

Recycling and recovery rate

100%

95%

90%

85%

80%

75%

70%

65%

60%

55%

50%

2009

2011

2013

2015

2017

2019

2021

In terms of other natural resources, we 
have other initiatives in place as follows:
Water
As primarily a distribution business, we 
generally have low usage of water. In 2022 
all sites were assessed for water stress, 
with no high-risk sites being identified. 
The Group’s four manufacturing sites, 
which have higher water usage, have 
processes in place to reduce usage  
where possible. All sites have reminders  
in place around conserving water. 

Paper
We have initiatives in progress to reduce 
our overall usage of paper. This includes 
making our internal processes more 
efficient by moving to paperless solutions, 
through gradual digitisation. This will enable 
a 75% reduction in paper usage at the head 
office in Coventry. The gradual rollout of 
our digital warehouse management system 
will also help our operating sites reduce 
paper usage. 

Waste management reporting 2022 
The Group continues to manage waste 
generated through its activities in a legal 
and environmentally responsible manner. 
We continue to prioritise segregation of 
recyclable materials and minimise waste 
contamination. Waste generated at our 
sites is segregated into differing waste 
streams and the Group’s manufacturing 
sites continue to re-use material where 
possible. The overall waste tonnages 
increased in line with full year reporting of 
acquisitions and additional turnover within 
the Group whilst maintaining our waste 
management objectives to deliver a high 
recycling and recovery rate.

We aim for 100% landfill avoidance by 
2030. Currently, over 99% of waste 
generated by Macfarlane Group avoids 
landfill and is re-used or recycled, 
contributing to a circular economy.

43

Reducing the environmental impact of our products

Packaging is an essential component to 
most supply chains to ensure products 
arrive at their destination safely and intact 
to prevent the need for multiple trips or 
additional purchasing due to damaged 
goods. However, it is important that this 
packaging uses the minimum amount of 
materials and that these are as recyclable 
as possible and contain as much recycled 
content as feasible whilst still performing 
as required.

The Group is committed to helping 
create a circular economy. This is helped 
by our primary focus on corrugated paper 
products, which represent around 
two-thirds of the value of products sold in 
2022 and are intrinsically environmentally 
friendly. They can be recycled up to 
seven times and are compostable at  
end of life. We will do this by ensuring 
better packaging design and sourcing. 
Our initiatives and goals include: 

Key goals:  
recycling and our products

By 2025 at least 90% of 
products will contain  
recycled content.

Status

2022 update

On track

•  Overall % of products sold that contain 

recycled content is 77%*.

•  Good progress in the year of cleansing  
data, following introduction of Plastics 
Packaging Tax.

•  Effective collaboration with strategic 
suppliers to increase plastic products  
that have recycled content.

By 2025 at least 90% of 
products will be recyclable. 
We classify ‘recyclable’ using 
OPRL guidelines, including 
kerbside pickup, as well as 
supermarket recycling. We  
do not include other schemes 
such as Terracycle. 

On track

•  Overall % of products sold that are  

recyclable is 89%*.

•  Good progress in the year of cleansing data 
and updating environmental attributes.

•  Recyclability of products continues to evolve 
slowly, especially in areas such as packaging 
tape. 90% remains our aspirational goal.

* First year reporting therefore no prior year comparative.

Work has been undertaken to evaluate 
the recycled content within our products. 
Given the vast range of products that the 
Group supplies this has been a significant 
undertaking. We are pleased to report 
that we have now analysed the majority  
of our Distribution product mix and 
confirmed 77% of our packaging has 
recycled content of 30% or more within it, 
while 89% of our packaging is recyclable. 
This initiative will continue into 2023, to 
ensure our data is as accurate as possible.

Leading sustainable change  
in protective packaging 
We recognise our responsibility to lead 
sustainable change in packaging distribution 
through ethical and environmentally friendly 
procurement and sourcing. Packaging 

should be designed with consideration 
of its entire lifecycle to help reduce its 
impact on the planet.

To make recycling as easy as possible for 
our end-consumers, we are also looking 
to provide clear and consistent recycling 
instructions on any own-brand packaging 
we supply. 

We are investing in our circular design 
capability, through training for our 
procurement and iLab teams, including 
our Northern iLab to be opened in 2023. 
We also continue to be a member of 
Sedex, who provide independent 
verification of responsible operations 
and ethical sourcing.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information44 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

ESG report  
(continued)

Social: supporting our employees and  
the communities we operate within

Supporting our customers to  
build a sustainable future
Our success is dependent on us 
meeting the needs and aspirations of 
our customers and their customers. 
Packaging plays a key part in the 
sustainability goals for businesses,  
with many looking to reduce packaging 
use and minimise material waste. 

The Group works in partnership with  
its customers and suppliers to ensure 
that we provide an expert, independent 
and tailored approach, which takes into 
consideration the impact which the 
products and services we provide have 
on the environment. To measure how 
we are supporting customers and 
continually improving our products  
and services we have put the following 
goals and initiatives in place: 

By 2025 we aim for our Net Promotor 
Score, in the Distribution division, to  
be 60 (the average NPS score for B2B 
companies in 2022 was 33) to ensure 
we are providing world class customer 
satisfaction. Macfarlane Group aims 
for customer satisfaction scores in  
our annual survey for all divisions to 
remain above 90%. By 2025, we aim  
for this to be 95%. 

Throughout 2022 we have continued  
to support our customer in building a 
sustainable future. This has included: 

•  Successfully piloting out Microsoft 
Dynamics as the new CRM system,  
and commencing our rollout across  
key operating sites;

•  Training of Distribution’s external sales 
staff to use the Macfarlane Packaging 
Optimiser so they can help customers 
make informed choices about 
sustainability and packaging.

Microsoft Dynamics will continue to be 
rolled out as the new Macfarlane Packaging 
CRM system in 2023. This will allow us to 
protect and use customer data more 
effectively to make sure customers are 
offered products and services that 
enhance their experience.

Investing in the community we serve 
Engaging with the community and its 
stakeholders is more than providing 
financial support. Macfarlane Group 
believes that understanding the 
communities within which we operate 
allows us to serve our people and 
stakeholders in these local areas better 
and more sustainably. To support our 
approach, we launched our colleague 
Volunteer Day scheme in the Summer 
2022, giving our colleagues the 
opportunity to get involved in community 
projects, along with empowering them  
to pro-actively fundraise, and support 
charity initiatives throughout the year.

Macfarlane Group has several initiatives 
aimed at supporting the communities  
we serve, including: 
•  Supporting our colleagues in raising 
funds for charitable causes alongside 
our own pro-active fundraising.

•  Giving our colleagues the opportunity  
to spend at least one day per year 
volunteering through our community 
engagement scheme.

Protecting our colleagues and culture 
Our colleagues make the difference in our 
business. The value added by each individual 
ensures Macfarlane Group continues to 
grow and remain successful. By enabling, 
encouraging, and empowering our people 
whilst striving for an inclusive culture where 
colleagues have the confidence to be 
themselves, Macfarlane Group is aiming  
to create a culture where everyone can 
achieve their full potential.

Macfarlane Group has a wide range of 
initiatives that help to protect and develop 
our colleagues and culture: 
•  We protect our colleagues’ wellbeing 
now and in the future by providing an 
‘employee assistance programme’ (EAP). 
This includes access to independent 
specialised counselling, a 24/7 support 
line and online portal, and our own 
internal fully qualified Mental Health First 
Aiders. We also launched a dedicated 
intranet page on Mental Health and 
Wellbeing this year, with information, 
advice, and top tips on mental, physical, 
and financial health topics.

Net Promoter Score/customer satisfaction

NPS
Annual customer satisfaction score

2022

50
92%

2021

48
91%

2020

53
91%

Commentary 
Throughout 2022, Net Promotor Score engagement programmes have assisted 
colleagues in understanding the importance of world-class customer satisfaction. 
Despite challenging market conditions, customer satisfaction has increased.

45

We encourage the engagement of 
every colleague to ensure the delivery 
of an outstanding service to our 
customers. This is achieved through  
a number of tools including business 
update sessions run by our CEO, 
functional forums, regular structured 
meetings, focus groups, informal review 
meetings, anonymous feedback forms, 
Company newsletters and colleague 
surveys. These methods, along with 
individual one-to-one discussions, 
provide opportunities for individuals to 
engage in two-way dialogue covering 
topics such as the overall wellbeing of 
our employees in addition to business 
and personal performance. 

The Group-wide implementation  
of Microsoft Teams has improved  
the level of connectivity across the 
business. Platforms such as this,  
along with tools such as Yammer, will 
enable us, to continue to widen our 
feedback and engagement channels.

•  We launched our Group colleague 

engagement survey, ‘You told us! We 
are taking Action.’ Our Group survey 
was open to all colleagues across the 
organisation, including acquisitions, and 
received 57% participation. Since the 
results were compiled and distributed,  
a group of managers and HR personnel 
have collaborated to identify key areas 
for improvement and actions to 
improve. This year, we communicated 
our action plans and commitments. 
Furthermore, we’ve launched our first 
site-specific ‘Great Place to Work’ 
(GPTW) listening group, which will  
allow for greater collaboration, the 
development of trust and respect,  
and improved communications.
•  We aim to increase awareness of 

Diversity, Equality, and Inclusion (DEI) 
through mandatory training for 
colleagues in leadership roles. To 
support our ambitions, we have 
designed a two-part DEI Training course 
in collaboration with ACAS. Part 1 – 
Overview of DEI, Part 2 consists  
of two sections: ‘Managing Difficult 
Conversations’ and ‘Unconscious Bias.’
•  In 2022, we launched our new Diversity, 
Equality and Inclusion Policy and Guide 
to Discrimination, Bullying, Harassment, 
Sexual Harassment & Victimisation. 
•  In 2022, 95% of our senior managers 
have received full DEI training. 50% of 
our remaining managers completed or 
are scheduled to complete the training 
between December 2022 and February 
2023. As previously stated, we have 
taken our ambitions a step further by 
making a Part 2 DEI offer. We aim for all 
managers to complete Part 2 training 
by the end of 2023.

•  Each site will have a DEI champion  

by 2023.

Employee development 
Macfarlane Group believes that each 
employee should be provided with the 
opportunity to realise their potential. 
Through several mechanisms, 
including Career Development Plans, 
Apprenticeship Schemes and the 
Macfarlane Leadership Programme, 
we provide a platform for personal 
development and career enhancement 
whilst also ensuring, through structured 
training, that employees have the 
correct skills and knowledge to 
effectively fulfil their role.

The significant developments in 
technology within Macfarlane Group 
over the past two years have enabled us 
to enhance virtual training programmes, 
supporting our ability to engage all 
employees in their development no 
matter where they are geographically 
located. The Group has provided an 
average of 15 hours of training per 
employee in 2022, a decrease on 2021: 
16 hours due primarily to the sale of 
Labels in December 2021 which had a 
higher hours of training per employee 
related to health and safety.

Employee engagement 
Our aim as a business is to be an 
inclusive employer of choice. The 
successful engagement of our 
employees is not only critical to us 
achieving this aim but also in ensuring 
the overall success of the business.

Excellent colleague communication 
continues to be a key area of focus.  
We have a framework of internal 
communication channels which  
seek to inform, engage and inspire 
individuals on matters of potential 
interest to them alongside wider 
business performance.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder informationIt is worth noting that the mean bonus  
pay gap for 2021 was 16.1% higher for 
females, whereas in previous years the 
gap was 46%. This shift is reflective of the 
bonus scheme paid within the relevant 
period, being adopted to deal with the 
impact of Covid-19, with all employees 
being placed on a same scheme.

Macfarlane Group is a progressive company 
operating in a traditionally male oriented 
sector. We continue to engage in initiatives 
that promote a career in Logistics and 
Production to those in under-represented 
groups, and our focus on this area will 
enable us to build toward having a more 
diverse organisation in future years.

Macfarlane Group Gender Pay Gap 
information can be found on our website 
(www.macfarlanegroup.com).

46 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

ESG report  
(continued)

Employee wellbeing 
Inspiring and enabling our colleagues 
to fulfil their potential starts with 
supporting their overall wellbeing.  
We are passionate about creating a 
culture where all our colleagues feel  
able to seek support and have access to 
helpful resources. Throughout the year 
we raised awareness of mental ill health 
and encouraged all our colleagues to 
understand that mental health is an 
issue for everyone.

Guides, support tools and online 
training have been made available  
to all employees with the aim of 
creating a healthy, supportive  
working environment. A full Employee 
Assistance Programme (EAP) is available 
24/7 to all our colleagues with Mental 
Health First Aiders available for support 
in the workplace. In 2022, we’ve also 
launched our international EAP service 
for our colleagues in Ireland, the 
Netherlands and Germany. 

As a Group we understand how 
important a healthy home life is to an 
individual’s wellbeing. Flexible working 
practices, including hybrid working, are 
adopted whenever possible to support 
the ability of employees to manage the 
demands of both work and home.

Diversity 
Throughout Macfarlane Group we 
continue to work to create a more diverse 
and inclusive culture. This will in turn 
improve our performance, better reflect 
the communities we operate within and 
enhance our employee engagement.  
In support of this aim we plan to improve 
the quality of the diversity information  
we gather on our colleagues over the  
next 12 months.

The gender breakdown of Directors, Senior 
Managers and other Group employees at 
the year-end is shown in the table below.

Gender pay gap 
Macfarlane Group, as in previous years, 
reported its Gender Pay Gap information 
for the snapshot date 5 April 2021. The 
report showed men’s mean hourly rate  
to be 2.4% higher than women’s and 
women’s median hourly rate to be 12.1% 
higher than men. The median pay gap  
is reflective of the number of women 
employed in the sales function, where 
their pay is impacted by the ability to earn 
bonus in a set period. This result is also 
influenced by the fact that the lower 
earning band of employees in production 
and logistics is predominantly male.

These results do however change when 
reviewing the mean pay gap information. 
This is reflective of the demographics of the 
Senior Executive team and those Printers 
(typically male) employed in Macfarlane 
Labels (sold in December 2021) as skilled 
professionals, who receive competitive 
basic pay and a full shift system, offering a 
significant uplift on standard hourly rates.

Diversity

Directors
Senior Managers
All other employees

2022

2021*

Male

Female

5
12
616

2
6
327

Male

6
13
597

Female

1
6
333

* 2021 numbers have been restated to reflect the sale of the Labels business in December 2021.

47

•  Anti-bribery and corruption –  
the Group has an anti-bribery  
and corruption policy, which is 
supplemented by a gift register and 
an associated policy on accepting 
gifts. This was externally reviewed  
in 2020. 

•  Whistleblowing policy – there is 

provision for employees to use an 
independent service if they are not 
comfortable speaking to anyone 
within the Group about any matters 
which give them concern. This service 
is promoted throughout the Group. 
This provision was extended during 
2020 to include a specific support line 
linked to Covid-19 and the Health & 
Safety of every stakeholder.

•  Modern Slavery Act – each year,  

the Group make a statement under 
the Modern Slavery Act which is 
supported by internal procedures  
to ensure that the principles of the 
act are adhered to. The statement  
is available on the website  
(www.macfarlanegroup.com). 

No material breaches of the above 
policies were noted during 2022,  
nor were any matters of significant 
concern reported through our 
whistleblowing service. 

Human rights 
•  In 2022, Macfarlane Group launched  

a new Human Rights policy. 

We also have other policies that reflect 
established human rights principles. 
These include:

•  Equality – We are committed to 

providing equality of opportunity to 
colleagues and potential colleagues.

This applies to recruitment, training, career 
development and promotion, regardless of 
physical ability, gender, sexual orientation 
or gender reassignment, pregnancy and 
maternity, race, religious beliefs, age, 
nationality or ethnic origin. Full and fair 
consideration is given to employment 
applications by people with disabilities 
wherever suitable opportunities exist, 
having regard to their particular aptitudes 
and abilities.

Striving to ensure that the work 
environment is free of harassment and 
bullying and that everyone is treated  
with dignity and respect is an important 
aspect of ensuring equal opportunities  
in employment and there is a specific 
Dignity at Work Policy, which deals with 
these issues. Where an employee 
becomes disabled, every effort is made  
to ensure that their employment with the 
Group continues and that appropriate 
adjustments are made. Disabled 
employees receive equal opportunities 
regarding selection for training, career 
development and promotion. 

Engagement – the Group recognises the 
importance of meaningful communication 
and consultation in maintaining good 
employee relations. This is achieved 
through formal and informal meetings 
across all business units. 

Recent partnership with  
the charity Blue Cross

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information48 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

ESG report  
(continued)

Health & Safety 
Macfarlane Group continues to adopt  
risk-based approach to our Health & 
Safety programme. This ensures that 
resources are directed in the most 
efficient and effective way possible.

In 2022 we:

•  Embedded the Health and Safety 

Management System into the Group 
including 2021 acquisitions – this is to 
ensure all Accidents, Incidents, Near 
Misses and Safety Observations  
are captured and all investigation 
findings are identified and actioned. 
We are currently reviewing legacy 
Health and Safety reporting systems 
at the 2022 acquisition, PackMann, 
with a view to integrating them into 
the Group system.

•  Installed Automatic External 

Defibrillators (AED’s) in all the UK and 
Ireland Group sites – to promote that 
the welfare of our people is important 
to the Group.

•  Developed a Health and Safety 

Training Programme – ensuring all 
our people understand why Health 
and Safety is important and the key 
role that they play in improving the 
safety of our sites.

•  Full Health and Safety Audit Schedule 
completed – all Group sites including 
2021 and 2022 acquisitions were audited 
against legislative and Macfarlane 
Group policies and standards.

Accident Frequency Rate
The Accident Frequency Rate (‘AFR’) 
representing the number of reportable 
incidents per 100,000 person-hours 
worked is shown below.

Four reportable incidents occurred  
in 2022 compared to five in 2021. All 
reportable incidents are investigated 
thoroughly by our Health & Safety team 
and changes to working practices 
implemented if required. We also ensure 
that training in a particular area where 
incidents have arisen is reinforced. 

Slips, trips, and falls are the highest cause 
of reportable incidents, and we continue 
to review and improve our training and 
oversight of these activities as part of  
our ongoing commitment to the safety  
of our people.

In 2023, our aims are continuous 
improvement in our positive safety culture 
and reduce recorded accidents, ensuring 
all our sites are safe places of work for our 
colleagues and all stakeholders. Some of 
the actions we plan to complete include:

•  delivering Health and Safety awareness 

training to all site managers;

•  conducting HSQE Representative 

training, including accident/incident 
investigations;
identifying a suitable E-learning 
platform to enhance training;

• 

•  detailed analysis of our leading and 

trailing indicators to identify trends and 
areas for further improvements which 
will be used to drive the safety culture 
improvements and Health and Safety 
strategy for the next few years;

•  monitoring actions identified through 
monthly site inspections and ensuring 
these are regularly reviewed; and

•  continue to engage all members of the 

leadership team in the safety inspection 
programme.

Accident Frequency Rate (AFR)

2022

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

Packaging Distribution
Manufacturing Operations

Group 

0.15
0.49

0.23

0.22
0.50

0.28

0.18
1.17

0.45

0.15
0.43

0.23

0.48
1.20

0.73

0.53
0.22

0.43

0.42
1.11

0.64

1.4

1.2

1.0

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

0

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

2021

2022

Packaging Distribution

Manufacturing 
Operations

Group

Linear (Packaging 
Distribution)

Linear (Manufacturing 
Operations

Linear (Group)

49

Governance: having the governance structures in  
place to support values-based decision-making

Board 
Background
The Board makes decisions in full 
consideration of their potential effect on 
the environment, employees and local 
communities. Since the end of 2021, ESG 
has been embedded as a standing item on 
the Board agenda, although prior to this it 
was an area of frequent Board discussion. 
It is clearly understood that only with a 
firm commitment to sustainability can  
the Group continue to grow and flourish.

Diversity
The Board is fully committed to diversity, 
on the basis that the best quality personnel 
from a range of backgrounds can enhance 
the overall quality of our business. This is 
also fully supported across the Group. The 
positive gender pay gap in the organisation 
is clear evidence of this positive approach 
and the appointment of our first female 
Chair of the Board, Aleen Gulvanessian,  
in 2022, as well as 33% of Board Directors 
now being female.

Executive Pay
Macfarlane Group is proud of its prudent 
and transparent approach to Executive 
Remuneration. Further details on this can 
be found in our Directors’ Remuneration 
Report on pages 56 to 64.

Tax
Macfarlane Group takes a highly 
conservative and prudent approach  
to meeting its tax obligations, ensuring  
it pays the right amount of tax in a 
transparent manner. This includes no 
elaborate overseas schemes to avoid  
tax, with the appropriate tax paid in all  
the territories in which we operate.

Ethics
There are clear policies in place to 
promote strong ethics in the business. 
This is further supported by our core value 
of integrity, ensuring that is the basis for 
our key decisions and interactions.

About this report 
•  Transparent reporting and 

benchmarking 

•  Statistics and scope 

How Macfarlane Group has measured 
carbon emissions for this report 
To measure the carbon emissions EcoAct 
(Atos) has used the main requirements of 
the standard ISO 14064:2018 Greenhouse 
gasses – Part 1, specifications with 
guidance at the organisation level for the 
quantification and reporting of greenhouse 
gas emissions and removals.

All data is generated from invoices and 
purchases of energy. Some electricity 
data has been generated by landlords; 
where meters are shared across multiple 
tenants and therefore the site is allocated  
a proportion of total consumption. Some 
invoices are only issued after the 
reporting period, or quarterly invoices 
covering the year end in part and not 
received until after publication of the 
report. These invoices are estimated,  
but do not cover greater than 5% of total 
energy consumption. Estimated usages 
are based on the preceding three months 
consumption data.

In this report, the term Carbon emissions 
not only includes carbon dioxide (CO2) but all 
other greenhouse gasses: methane (CH4), 
nitrous oxide (N2O), hydrofluorocarbons 
(HFC), perfluorocarbons (PFC) and sulphur 
hexafluoride (SF6).

Carbon emissions are calculated and 
reported in tonnes of CO2 equivalent 
(tCO2e) following recommended  
best practice.

The carbon footprint calculations  
use published emission factors and 
agreed formulae taken from the UK 
Government Conversion Factors for 
Company Reporting, Department for 
Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy 
(BEIS) 2021 and the International 
Energy Agency electricity emissions 
factors 2020.

Recycled and recyclable
Recycling is the process of converting 
waste materials into new materials  
and objects. The recovery of energy 
from waste materials is often included  
in this concept.

Recyclable material can be defined  
as material which would otherwise 
become municipal waste, which can  
be processed into the form of raw 
material for new products.

We have cleansed and updated the 
recycling statistics for over 80% of our 
turnover, as part of the introduction of 
this metric, given we have over 20,000 
different items. This percentage will be 
further increased in 2023.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information50 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Non-financial information statement

The table below sets out how the Group has complied  
with the Non-Financial Reporting Requirements set out in 
Sections 414C and 414CB of the Companies Act 2006. Where 
these provisions do not form part of the Strategic Report, 
they are deemed to be incorporated by cross-reference  
for the purposes of compliance with these sections.

Reporting requirement

Details including the impact on Macfarlane Group including any risks  
in relation to these matters and financial and non-financial KPIs

Business model

Our business model is described on page 8.

Outlook and developments

Main trends/factors likely to affect the future development, performance and position of the 
business including KPIs are set out in the Business and Finance reviews and in the Sustainability 
Report both within the Strategic Report on pages 4 to 50.

Principal risks 

The Principal Risks, potential adverse impacts and mitigating actions are set out in the Principal 
Risks and Uncertainties section on pages 24 to 28.

Stakeholder engagement

Employees

The Stakeholder Engagement section on pages 29 to 32 includes details summarising how 
Directors have had regard to the need to foster the Company's and the Group’s business 
relationships with all stakeholders, and the effect on the principal decisions taken by the Group 
during the financial year.

The main policies and interactions with our employees are set out in the Business Review on 
pages 10 to 19, Principal Risks and Uncertainties on pages 24 to 28, the Stakeholder Engagement 
section on pages 29 to 32, the Employees section of the Sustainability Report on pages 44 to 48 
and the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 56 to 64.

Environmental matters

Environmental matters are disclosed in the Environmental Care section of our Sustainability 
Report on pages 38 to 43 and the Stakeholder Engagement section on pages 29 to 32.

Financial risk management 

Details of the use of financial instruments and financial risk management are set out in the 
Finance review on page 22.

Human rights

Details of our policies in these areas are set out in the Human Rights section of our Sustainability 
Report on page 47.

Social and community matters

Social and Community matters are disclosed in the Stakeholder Engagement section on pages 
29 to 32 and the Sustainability Report on pages 44 to 48.

Anti-bribery and corruption  
and whistleblowing

Details of our policies in these areas are set out in the Human Rights section of our Sustainability 
Report on page 47.

Post year end events

Details of important events affecting the Group which have occurred since the end of the 
financial year are included on page 117.

Overseas branches

Details of the Group’s overseas branches are included on page 132.

Chair’s introduction to governance

51

Macfarlane is a company proud  
of our history, which is value-led,  
and has a strong culture of integrity.

There is a culture of integrity on the Board, 
which underpins our transparent approach 
with our key stakeholders. There is also a 
highly transparent approach to Executive 
Remuneration, as outlined in our 
Directors’ Remuneration Report on  
pages 56 to 64. A full version of the Code 
can be found on the Financial Reporting 
Council’s website www.frc.org.uk.

Sustainability
As the leading packaging distributor in  
the UK, we have a vital role to play in the 
sustainability of our products and in the 
circular economy. The Board places great 
emphasis on this and other Environmental, 
Social and Governance (‘ESG’) matters, 
with ESG now a standing item on the  
Board agenda. I am pleased that in 2022 
the Board approved the commissioning  
of solar panels at our Grantham 
manufacturing site. It was also pleasing  
to see the introduction of our first electric 
truck in the year, as part of a wider planned 
rollout. We remain committed to reduce 
the carbon footprint of our CO2 per 
tonnage of sold items by 30% by 2030.

Aleen Gulvanessian 
Chair

23 February 2023

Dear shareholder,

I am pleased to present the Group’s 
Corporate Governance Report for the year 
ended 31 December 2022. The business 
aims to apply and maintain the highest 
standards of Corporate Governance, 
offering a strong framework that delivers 
and protects value for all our stakeholders. 
Further detail on how we engage with our 
stakeholders, as per s172 of the Companies 
Act 2006, can be found on pages 29 to 32.

Board effectiveness
The Board undertakes a performance 
evaluation each year to ensure that the 
Board and its underlying Committees  
are operating effectively. Details of this 
evaluation are covered within the Corporate 
Governance Report. The findings confirm 
that the Board has the right balance of skills, 
experience, knowledge and independence, 
further reinforced by the appointment of 
Laura Whyte on 1 October 2022.

Compliance with the UK  
Corporate Governance Code
The Board confirms that, during 2022, the 
Group has complied with the provisions  
of the UK Corporate Governance Code 
(the ‘Code’), with the exception of;

•  Provision 10 which relates to the 
independence of Non-Executive 
Directors. One Non-Executive Director 
has served on the Board for more  
than nine years and this is explained  
in the Corporate Governance report  
on page 65.

•  Provision 38 which relates to alignment 

of Executive Directors pension 
contribution rates to those available to 
the workforce. The Executive Directors 
receive pension contributions equivalent 
to 8% of basic salary which is aligned to 
other senior managers but not the 
majority of the workforce.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information 
52 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Board of Directors

Ivor Gray
Finance Director 
Ivor is a member of The Institute of 
Chartered Accountants of Scotland  
and has been with the Group since  
1996. He was appointed as a Director on 
19 November 2020 and became Finance 
Director on 1 January 2021. Ivor has been 
on the Executive Committee since 2005 
and was the Group’s Company Secretary 
from 15 May 2020 to 31 December 2020. 
He was with KPMG LLP for six years before 
joining Macfarlane Group in 1996.

Bob McLellan
Non-Executive Director and  
Senior Independent Director
Bob joined the Board on 5 March 2013. He 
was Chief Executive of DS Smith Packaging 
UK until 2011, latterly as Deputy CEO 
Packaging (UK and Continental Europe). 
Bob has spent many years working in the 
packaging sector and has held leading roles 
in both the UK and Continental Europe for 
industry employer associations. He is 
currently Chairman of the Logson Group. 
Bob chaired the Remuneration Committee 
until 31 August 2018 when he was 
appointed as the Group’s Senior 
Independent Director. He is a member  
of the Nominations, Remuneration  
and Audit Committees.

Aleen Gulvanessian
Chair
Aleen joined the Board on 1 October 
2021, becoming Chair on 1 October 
2022 following a year as Remuneration 
Committee Chair. Aleen was a corporate 
partner at Eversheds Sutherland for  
30 years before stepping down in May 
2019 to become a Consultant on 
Boards and Governance matters. Aleen 
is an experienced corporate lawyer 
who has advised private and quoted  
UK companies (including cross border 
transactions) across a range of sectors. 
Her areas of focus have been mergers 
and acquisitions, joint ventures, 
corporate finance transactions and 
reorganisations, as well as general 
boardroom and governance advice for 
quoted companies. Aleen is a member 
of the Governance Committee of the 
Institute of Chartered Accountants in 
England and Wales, to which she was 
appointed in June 2019. In 2022, Aleen 
became Chair of Xitus Insurance 
Limited and it’s holding company, an 
insurance business focused on run-off 
liabilities, which is regulated by the FCA 
and PRA. Aleen also serves on not for 
profit boards. 

Peter Atkinson
Chief Executive
Peter joined Macfarlane Group as Chief 
Executive in October 2003. He has a 
strong sales and marketing background 
through his career at Procter & Gamble 
and S.C. Johnson. Peter also has 
significant general management 
experience gained during his time at 
GKN PLC and its joint venture partners 
where he worked from 1988 to 2001 in a 
number of senior executive roles in their 
business-to-business operations. He 
has a successful track record of both 
business turnarounds and business 
development with extensive exposure 
to international business, having worked 
in the UK, Europe and the USA.

James Baird
Non-Executive Director
James joined the Board on 8 January 
2018. James previously led the Scotland 
and Northern Ireland business of Deloitte, 
before becoming Managing Partner of its 
Audit & Risk Advisory division and Chief 
Operating Officer, both in Switzerland.  
An experienced auditor and advisor who 
has worked with companies in the UK  
and Europe across a range of industries, 
he is Professor of Practice at Glasgow 
University’s Adam Smith Business School, 
chair of trustees of RS Macdonald 
Charitable Trust, a trustee of Rainforest 
Trust UK and chair of the ICAS Research 
Panel. James was appointed as chair  
of the Audit Committee on his 
appointment on 8 January 2018 and  
is a member of both the Remuneration  
and Nominations Committees.

Laura Whyte
Non-Executive Director
Laura joined the Board on 1 October 
2022. Laura had a long-standing career  
at John Lewis where she served on the 
Management Board for over ten years, 
latterly as HR Director. She led several 
business initiatives in support of retailing, 
with a particular focus on the customer 
experience. Since 2014 she has worked  
as a Non-Executive Director with several 
organisations. Her roles include Capital 
and Regional plc where she chairs the 
Remuneration and ESG Committees  
and is a member of the Audit and 
Nominations Committees, The British 
Horseracing Authority and the Old  
Naval College Greenwich.

James Macdonald
Company Secretary 
James joined Macfarlane Group in 
October 2020, becoming Company 
Secretary on 1 January 2021. He 
previously worked for The Weir  
Group PLC, after undertaking his 
accountancy training at PwC. He is a 
member of the Institute of Chartered 
Accountants of Scotland. 

53

Corporate information 

Registration number 
No. SC 004221 
Registered in Scotland

Company Secretary
James Macdonald

Registered office
3 Park Gardens  
Glasgow G3 7YE  
Telephone: 0141 333 9666 
Email: info@macfarlanegroup.com

Principal bankers
Lloyds Banking Group PLC 
110 St. Vincent Street 
Glasgow G2 5ER

Solicitors
CMS Cameron McKenna  
Nabarro Olswang LLP 
1 West Regent Street 
Glasgow G2 1AP

Wright Johnston & Mackenzie LLP 
302 St. Vincent Street 
Glasgow G2 5RZ

Stockbrokers
Shore Capital Stockbrokers Limited 
Cassini House 
57-58 St James’s Street 
London SW1A 1LD

Independent auditor
Deloitte LLP 
110 Queen Street 
Glasgow G1 3BX

Registrars
Equiniti 
Aspect House 
Spencer Road 
Lancing 
West Sussex BN99 6DA

Aleen Gulvanessian

Peter Atkinson

Ivor Gray

James Baird

Bob McLellan

Laura Whyte

James Macdonald

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information54 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Report of the Directors

The Directors present their annual 
report and the audited financial 
statements of the Group for the year 
ended 31 December 2022. Pages 8 to 
74 inclusive comprise the Directors’ 
Report, which in turn includes the 
Chair’s Statement and the Strategic 
Report on pages 4 to 50. These 
reports have been drawn up and 
presented in accordance with and  
in reliance upon applicable company 
law and any liability of the Directors  
in connection with these reports 
shall be subject to the limitations and 
restrictions provided by such laws. 

The Company has chosen to disclose 
the following information within the 
Annual Report:

•  Details of the use of financial 
instruments and financial risk 
management by the Group (page 22).
•  Details of important events affecting 
the Group which have occurred since 
the end of the financial year (page 117).

•  An indication of likely future 

developments in the business  
of the Group (pages 10 to 19). 
•  Details of the Group’s overseas 

branches (page 132).

Corporate governance
The information that fulfils the 
requirement of the Corporate 
Governance Statement can be found  
in the Corporate Governance Report  
on pages 65 to 73 (and is incorporated 
into this report by reference) with the 
exception of the information referred  
to in the Financial Conduct Authority 
Disclosure and Transparency Rules 
7.2.6, which is located within this report.

Report on greenhouse gas emissions
Details of the Group’s emissions  
and policies are contained within the 
Sustainability Report on pages 36 to 49.

Cautionary statement
The Chair’s Statement and the Strategic 
Report have been prepared to provide 
additional information to members of 
the Company to assess the Group’s 
strategy and the potential for the 
strategy to succeed. They should  
not be relied on by any other party  
or for any other purpose.

This report and the financial statements 
contain certain forward-looking 
statements relating to operations, 
performance and financial status. By their 
nature, such statements involve risk and 
uncertainty because they relate to events 
and depend upon circumstances that will 
occur in the future. There are a number  
of factors, including both economic and 
business risk factors, which could cause 
actual results or developments to differ 
materially from those expressed or implied 
by these forward-looking statements.

These statements are made by the 
Directors in good faith based on the 
information available to them up to the time 
of their approval of this report. Nothing in 
this report and the financial statements 
should be considered or construed as a 
profit forecast for the Group.

Results and dividends
The Group’s profit before tax from 
continuing activities was £19,934,000 
(2021: £18,655,000). This resulted in a 
profit for the year of £15,637,000 (2021: 
£12,598,000).

The Directors declared an interim 
dividend of 0.90p per share, which was 
paid on 13 October 2022 (2021: 0.87p per 
share). The proposed final dividend of 
2.52p per share (2021: 2.33p per share)  
is subject to approval by shareholders at 
the AGM in May 2023 and has not been 
included as a liability in these financial 
statements.

Capital structure
The Group funds its operations from  
a number of sources of cash, namely 
operating cash flow, bank borrowings, 
lease borrowings and shareholders’ equity, 
comprising share capital, reserves and 
retained earnings. The Group’s objective  
is to achieve a capital structure that results 
in an appropriate cost of capital whilst 
providing flexibility in immediate and 
medium-term funding to accommodate 
any material investment requirements.  
All major investment decisions reflect 
capital allocations which are designed  
to maintain the Group’s objective.

The Company has one class of ordinary 
share, which carries no right to fixed 
income. Each ordinary share carries the 
right to one vote at general meetings of 
the Company. There are no restrictions 

on the size of shareholdings nor on the 
transfer of shares. Both are governed  
by the Articles of Association of the 
Company (‘the Articles’) and prevailing 
legislation. The Directors are not aware  
of any agreements between the 
Company’s shareholders that may  
result in restrictions on the transfer  
of securities or on voting rights.

No person has any special rights of control 
over the Company’s share capital and all 
issued shares are fully paid. 525,000 
shares were issued in 2022 in relation to 
the vesting of the 2019 award under the 
2016 Performance Share Plan to Executive 
Directors. Further details of this can be 
seen in Note 19 to the financial statements. 

The Company’s banking facilities may, at 
the discretion of the lender, be repayable 
on a change of control.

The Company is governed by the Articles, 
the UK Corporate Governance Code  
(July 2018) and the Companies Act 2006 
with regard to the appointment and 
replacement of Directors. The Articles 
may be amended by special resolution  
of the shareholders. The powers of the 
Directors are detailed in the Corporate 
Governance report.

The Directors will propose an ordinary 
resolution at the 2023 AGM seeking 
authority to allot shares in the Company 
under section 551 of the Companies Act 
2006 up to an aggregate nominal amount 
of £13,194,750. 

At the 2022 AGM, the Directors were 
given authority to allot further ordinary 
shares, disapplying any pre-emption 
rights, beyond those committed to the 
share option schemes or long-term 
incentive plans up to an aggregate 
nominal value of £3,945,300, which 
expires at the conclusion of the 2023 
AGM. Resolutions at the 2023 AGM  
will seek to renew for a further year the 
authority over the existing unissued and 
uncommitted ordinary share capital of 
£3,958,425 – being 10% of share capital 
following the 2022 issuance of shares 
noted above.

The Company made no purchases of its 
own shares during the year and no shares 
were acquired by forfeiture or surrender 
or made subject to a lien or charge.

55

Substantial holdings

Funds managed or advised by Rights & Issues Investment Trust plc
Funds managed by Canaccord Genuity Group Inc.
Funds managed or advised by Blackrock
Funds managed or advised by Charles Stanley
Funds managed or advised by Otus Capital Management
Almadon Limited
Funds managed or advised by BGF Investment Management

Number of
 shares held

17,250,000
16,004,821
11,319,377
10,376,912
7,973,482
7,284,058
6,985,420

Percentage

10.9%
10.1%
7.1%
6.6%
5.0%
4.6%
4.4%

Independent auditor
A resolution to re-appoint Deloitte  
LLP as the Company’s auditor will be 
proposed at the AGM in 2023.

Company information
The Company is registered in Scotland 
(SC004221) and its registered office is 
at 3 Park Gardens, Glasgow, G3 7YE.

Approval
The Strategic Report on pages 4 to 50 
and the Directors’ Report on pages  
4 to 74 were both approved by the 
Board on 23 February 2023.

James Macdonald
Company Secretary

23 February 2023

Employees and employee share schemes
The Company’s policies for employees and 
employee engagement are set out in the 
Sustainability Report on pages 44 to 48. 
Option awards are detailed in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report with those awards 
outstanding at 31 December 2022 set out 
on pages 59 and 60.

No Director, either during or at the end  
of the financial year, had an interest in any 
contract relating to the business of the 
Company or any of its subsidiaries. The 
statement of Directors’ interests in the 
ordinary share capital of Macfarlane 
Group is contained in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on page 60.

The Remuneration Committee  
supervises the award of long-term share 
incentives and specifies the performance 
conditions at the time of the award, 
having regard to the objectives of the 
Company and market practice at that 
time. Further details are given in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report.

Substantial holdings of shares  
in the Company
The Company has received notification 
prior to 23 February 2023 in accordance 
with Rule 5 of the Financial Conduct 
Authority’s Disclosure and Transparency 
Rules of the voting rights as a shareholder 
of the Company shown in the table above.

Directors
The names of the Directors in office at  
31 December 2022 and to the date of this 
report together with short biographical 
details, are set out on page 52. The Board 
considers its three Non-Executive 
Directors to be independent.

All Directors retire by rotation at the  
AGM in May 2023 and offer themselves  
for re-election. P.D. Atkinson and I. Gray 
have service contracts dated 6 October 
2003 and 23 December 2020 respectively, 
with notice periods of twelve months.  
A. Gulvanessian has a letter of appointment 
dated 27 September 2022 with a notice 
period of six months. R. McLellan, J.W.F. 
Baird and L. Whyte each have letters  
of appointment dated 10 March 2021,  
8 January 2021 and 13 September 2022 
respectively for periods of three years, 
with notice periods of three months.  
S. Paterson served as Chairman until  
30 September 2022. 

There are no agreements between the 
Company and its Directors or employees 
that provide for compensation for loss of 
office or employment that occurs in the 
event of change of control.

The Company has maintained Directors’ 
and Officers’ liability insurance cover 
throughout the financial year. The Company 
has made qualifying third-party indemnity 
provisions for the benefit of Directors 
which remain in force.

Political donations
It is the Group’s policy not to make 
donations for political purposes. 

Special business
A special resolution will be put to 
shareholders to renew for a further  
year the authority in relation to the 
disapplication of pre-emption rights over 
the existing unissued and uncommitted 
ordinary share capital. This authority is 
limited to a maximum nominal amount  
of £3,958,425, representing 10% of the 
current share capital.

Disclosure of information to auditor
The Directors holding office at the date of 
approval of this Directors’ report confirm 
that, so far as they are each aware, there is 
no relevant audit information of which the 
Company’s auditor is unaware. Each Director 
has taken all the steps that they ought to 
have taken as a Director to make themselves 
aware of any relevant audit information and 
to establish that the Company’s auditor is 
aware of that information. This confirmation 
is given and should be interpreted in 
accordance with the provisions of Section 
418 of the Companies Act 2006.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information 
56 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Remuneration report

Remuneration Committee Chair’s summary statement

Following my appointment as Chair  
of the Remuneration Committee in 
October 2022, I am pleased to present 
the Directors’ Remuneration Report 
for Macfarlane. 

•  PSP vesting will occur in 2023 relating to 
the 2020 PSP awards, with a maximum 
pay-out also expected due to the 
strong performance in the three year 
period ended 31 December 2022.

I would like to thank Aleen Gulvanessian 
for her work as the previous 
Remuneration Committee Chair.

We have disclosed the performance 
measures for our 2022 annual bonus  
plan on pages 58 and 59.

This Chair’s statement summarises 
the main areas of activity for the 
Remuneration Committee in the year 
and introduces the other sections of 
the Directors’ Remuneration Report. 
This year it comprises the Annual 
Report on Remuneration, which sets 
out the remuneration arrangements 
and incentive outcomes for the  
year under review and how the 
Remuneration Committee intends  
to implement our Policy in 2023.

Remuneration in 2022
Group results for 2022 are set out  
in our Strategic Review. We believe  
the financial results in the year are 
appropriately reflected in the 
remuneration of our Executive 
Directors, as follows: 

•  Annual bonus outcomes for the CEO 
and Finance Director for 2022 of 
66% and 64% of maximum amounts 
available respectively (maximum 
being 100% of base salary).
•  Performance Share Plan (‘PSP’) 

awards were made in March 2022, 
subject to three year EPS growth 
targets, which the Committee 
regards as appropriately stretching.
•  PSP vesting took place in relation  
to the 2019 PSP awards, with a 
maximum pay-out made to the  
CEO and Finance Director, as well  
as an award to the former Finance 
Director. This was the first vesting  
of the scheme introduced in 2019, 
and we are pleased that the award 
reflected the significant growth in 
the business during the period.

In 2022 our Board maintained its focus  
on our obligations to our workforce and  
to other stakeholders, with 94% of our 
employees receiving a bonus (2021: 87%). 
We also topped up mileage claims amount 
available to staff, to take into account 
higher petrol prices. We have staggered 
2023 salary increases with the lowest 
earners receiving the highest increases  
in a range from 3% to 8%. The salary 
increase for the 2022 period was 3%.

We are committed to supporting our 
valued team members in the face of  
cost of living increases and adopted this 
approach to doing so rather than making 
one off payments which would not deliver 
the longer term uplifts in pay.

With regards to the incentive plan 
outcomes for our Executive Directors 
described above, the Remuneration 
Committee reviewed these against the 
backdrop of overall performance and  
the experience of investors and other 
stakeholders over the period and the 
Remuneration Committee is satisfied  
that the total remuneration received  
by Executive Directors in 2022 is a fair 
reflection of performance over the period.

The Remuneration Committee  
exercised what it regards as normal 
commercial judgement in respect of 
Directors’ remuneration throughout  
the year (and in all cases in line with the 
approved remuneration policy) including  
in relation to: 

•  Setting performance metrics for normal 
course annual bonuses and PSP awards 
in the year; and 

•  Confirming the outcome of performance 
metrics for annual bonuses and PSP 
awards in the year. 

There were no other exercises  
of judgement or discretion by the 
Remuneration Committee save as  
detailed in this report.

Remuneration in 2023
The key components of executive 
remuneration at Macfarlane in 2023  
are substantially unchanged from 2022: 

Base Salaries and Benefits – base salaries 
for 2023 have increased by 7.4% (CEO) 
and 3% (Finance Director), with total fixed 
pay increasing by 1% (CEO) and 3% 
(Finance Director).

In last year’s Directors’ remuneration report 
we set out in detail our proposal to increase 
the CEO’s salary on a phased basis over a 
two year period together with the rationale 
for this change. The second phase of the 
increase was subject to the Remuneration 
Committee’s review of continued 
appropriateness. The Remuneration 
Committee has undertaken this review  
and agreed the proposed base pay increase 
of 7.4% for the CEO remains appropriate 
in the context of his total pay.

Last year the Remuneration Committee 
noted that the Finance Director’s salary is 
at the low end of the range for small cap 
quoted companies of our size and would 
be subject to further reviews in years to 
come. However, the Committee together 
with the Finance Director have agreed that 
it is not appropriate this year to undertake 
such a review due to the wider economic 
backdrop, but will do so in future.

•  Annual bonus – in 2023 there is again  
a maximum payment opportunity of 
100% of salary, with 75% of salary based 
on Profit before tax (‘PBT’) and 25% 
based on personal objectives, including 
an ESG metric.

•  Pension – the CEO and Finance Director 
pension contributions are now 8% of 
base salary, with the CEO’s contribution 
rate reduced from 15% for 2022.

57

•  Long term Incentives – the Committee’s 
intention is to make further PSP awards 
in 2023. The level of PSP awards for 
Executive Directors will be over shares 
with a value equivalent to up to 100%  
of base salaries. Vesting will again be 
subject to three-year EPS growth 
conditions with a further underpin 
vesting condition. Details of these 
awards will be set out in the 2023 
Directors’ Remuneration Report.

I do hope that you will feel able to continue 
to support the resolution to approve this 
Directors’ Remuneration Report at the 
AGM in May 2023. As a new Chair, I am 
available to shareholders for questions 
should you desire to contact me on any 
matters as disclosed in this report.

Laura Whyte 
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

23 February 2023

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information 
 
58 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Remuneration report
(continued)

Annual report on remuneration

The details set out on page 58 and 60 of this report have been audited by Deloitte LLP.

Single total figure of remuneration for each Director

2022

Chair
S.R. Paterson (to 30 Sep 22)
A. Gulvanessian (from 1 Oct 22)1
Executive Directors
P.D. Atkinson
I. Gray
Non-Executive Directors
R. McLellan
J.W.F. Baird
L.D. Whyte (from 1 Oct 22)

Total

2021

Chair
S.R. Paterson
Executive Directors
P.D. Atkinson
I. Gray
J. Love (retired 31 Mar 21)
Non-Executive Directors
R. McLellan
J.W.F. Baird
A.M. Dunstan (to 31 Aug 21)
A. Gulvanessian (from 1 Oct 21)

Total

Salary 
and fees
£000

Taxable
 benefits
£000

Pension 
costs
£000

Fixed 
pay
£000

Bonus
£000

LTIP
vesting
£000

Variable
 pay
£000

Total 
pay
£000

54
47

405
201

36
36
9

788

–
–

18
8

–
–
–

26

–
–

61
16

–
–
–

77

54
47

484
225

36
36
9

891

–
–

266
129

–
–
–

–
–

411
71

–
–
–

–
–

677
200

–
–
–

54
47

1,161
425

36
36
9

395

482

877

1,768

Salary 
and fees
£000

Taxable
 benefits
£000

Pension 
costs
£000

Fixed 
pay
£000

Bonus
£000

Variable
 pay
£000

Total 
pay
£000

70

369
191
45

35
35
23
9

777

–

16
8
2

–
–
–
–

–

80
15
11

–
–
–
–

70

465
214
58

35
35
23
9

–

184
96
–

–
–
–
–

26

106

909

280

–

–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–

–

184
96
–

–
–
–
–

70

649
310
58

35
35
23
9

280

1,189

1 

 £27,000 was paid in fees for the 9 month period to 30 September 2022 for role as Non-Executive Director  
and £20,000 was paid in fees for the 3 month period to 31 December 2022 for role as Chair.

Taxable benefits relate to provision of a Company car (or equivalent allowance) and private medical insurance.

Directors’ pension entitlements
P.D. Atkinson received a cash allowance which equates to 15% of his base salary, but reduced for the related employer’s national 
insurance contributions. (Note: this will be reduced to 8% in 2023, in line with the Finance Director).

I. Gray is a member of one of the Group’s defined contribution pension schemes, with an employer contribution of 8% of salary, 
consistent with other employees in that scheme.

Annual bonus for the year ended 31 December 2022
The 2022 annual bonus plan is based on performance against financial targets and personal objectives as set out in the 
Remuneration Policy and is paid in cash and deferred shares following Board approval of the Group Accounts. Both the financial 
targets and personal objectives were partially met and, as a result, an annual bonus of 66% of salary will be payable to the CEO  
and 64% of salary will be payable to the Finance Director. The original financial targets for 2022 are shown below:

Threshold
Target 
Maximum
Actual performance

25% of incentive
50% of incentive
100% of incentive

2022 profit before tax

£19.0m
£20.0m
£21.0m
£19.9m

59

Actual performance and targets includes only continuing operations for 2022.

A bonus of up to 25% of base salary is also payable for achievement of personal performance objectives with the Remuneration 
Committee being required to consider financial and overall performance before this element is paid.

In the year we looked at the following personal objectives. The CEO achieved four out of five objectives and the Finance Director 
achieved three out of four objectives: 

Peter Atkinson

Ivor Gray

•  Succession planning in Packaging Distribution 

•  Successful induction and integration of new IT Director

•  Effective execution of the growth by acquisition strategy 

•  Complete one acquisition

•  Exceed European Budget through either organic or  

•  Manage cash to achieve a £3m over Budget performance

acquisition programmes

•  Develop full potential of investment in new CRM, MS Dynamics

•  Lead Macfarlane Group sustainability agenda through  
strategy execution, customer and staff engagement

•  Gain Board approval to Group Sustainability Programme

The total bonus payable for 2022 to P.D. Atkinson was £265,832 (66% of salary), and I. Gray £129,045 (64% of salary). 25% of  
this bonus is payable in shares and deferred for two years, in line with the new Remuneration Policy approved at the 2022 AGM.

Long term incentives for the year ended 31 December 2022
The Company operates a PSP under which shares are awarded which vest subject to performance over a three-year period. 

Vesting outcomes for 2019 PSP awards

Performance measure

Target range

Earnings per share growth (100%)

Target range between 6.77p (25% vests)  
and 8.12p (100% vests)

Performance
achieved

Vesting 
outcome

% of total 
award vesting

8.54p1 

100%

100%

1 

 Earnings per share for Y/E 31st December 2021 were 7.90p (reported diluted), including a 0.64p non-cash adjustment solely related to the change in deferred 
tax rate on future amortisation of investments. There was no cash impact to shareholders from this adjustment, and therefore for the purposes of the PSPit was 
considered appropriate to exclude this item. Accordingly, the adjusted EPS for the year was 8.54p, which is above the maximum PSP target threshold of 8.12p.

In addition to the above target, the Committee confirmed that the underpin performance condition relating to the overall Group 
performance in the 2019 – 2021 period was met, given the strong growth during this time. 

Awards were granted on 25 March 2022 over shares worth 100% of salary to each of the Executive Directors (using the three day 
average market price of 129.00p to the last trading day prior to grant). PSP awards are granted in the form of conditional share 
awards and are subject to EPS performance conditions, as shown in the below table of existing awards. EPS is measured by dividing 
the profit after tax from total operations by the weighted average number of ordinary shares used to calculate diluted EPS.

Grant of PSP Award

Threshold (25%)

Maximum (100%)

Year end target date

2022
2021
2020

10.16p
7.95p
6.53p

12.19p
9.54p
7.84p

31 December 2024
31 December 2023
31 December 2022

Vesting of the awards above will also be subject to an underpin assessment by the Remuneration Committee that it must be 
satisfied regarding overall Group performance before vesting is confirmed. The awards are subject to a two-year post-vesting 
holding period.

Awards held at  
1 January 2022

Awards granted 
during the year

Awards exercised 
during the year2

Awards lapsed 
during the year

Awards held at  
31 December 2022

P.D. Atkinson
I. Gray

1,072,142
364,913

313,953
155,465

(330,123)
(57,266)

–
–

1,055,972
463,112

2 

 The 2019 PSP vesting at 100% and dividend equivalent awarded in shares were confirmed by the Remuneration Committee at its meeting on 21 February 2022.  
The total number of shares vesting were 330,123 and 19,394 shares delivered in respect of dividend equivalent for Peter Atkinson; 57,266 shares vesting and  
3,364 shares delivered in respect of dividend equivalents for Ivor Gray. Former Finance Director, John Love, received a pro-rated award of 102,054 shares vesting 
 and 5,995 shares delivered in respect of dividend equivalents, being 100% of the maximum pro-rated to his retirement date on 31 March 2021.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information60 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Remuneration report
(continued)

Payments to past Directors
As part of the 2019 PSP vesting John Love, former Finance Director, received a pro-rated award of 108,049 shares, being 100%  
of the maximum pro-rated to his retirement date on 31 March 2021.

Shareholdings and share interests of the Directors in office at 31 December 2022 were as set out below:

P.D. Atkinson
I. Gray
R. McLellan
J.W.F. Baird
A. Gulvanessian
L.D. Whyte (from 1 Oct 22)
S.R. Paterson (to 30 Sep 22)

2022 (or date of 
appointment if later)

2021 (or date of 
appointment if later)

Beneficial

Options

Beneficial

Options

1,035,047
116,076
116,132
66,605
15,553
9,200
120,000

1,055,972
463,112
–
–
–
–
–

854,172
66,652
102,819
66,605
–
–
120,000

1,072,142
364,913
–
–
–
–
–

All options above are subject to performance conditions being satisfied. Executive Directors are expected to build up a prescribed 
level of shareholding equivalent to 100% of base salary. P.D. Atkinson materially exceeds this requirement, with shares worth 
£1,076,449 at 31 December 2022. I. Gray is currently below this requirement given his recent appointment as a Director in 
November 2020, with £120,719.

Options held by P.D. Atkinson and I. Gray are in respect of the PSP awards made in 2020, 2021 and 2022. These are unvested and 
subject to the achievement of performance targets described earlier. 

J. Love, who retired on 31 March 2021, is considered a good leaver and therefore entitled to options pro-rated to his date of leaving 
and subject to performance conditions being achieved.

The share price ranged from 85.20p to 135.25p during 2022. The closing share price on 31 December 2022 was 104.00p (2021: 130.00p).

The remainder of the Annual Report on Remuneration is not subject to audit.

Performance graph and table
The graph below shows Macfarlane Group’s performance, measured by Total Shareholder Return, compared with the 
performance of the FTSE All-Share Index for Support Services, and the FTSE All-Share Index for General Industrials, also 
measured by Total Shareholder Return for the period since 1 January 2012. Macfarlane Group is a constituent part of the General 
Industrial Index. The Index for Support Services has also been selected because it includes a range of distributor companies, 
which the Remuneration Committee considers to be the most appropriate comparison to Macfarlane Group for this purpose.

Total shareholder return index

1,000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

2021

2022

Macfarlane Group

FTSE All Share 
General Industrials

FTSE All Share 
Support Services

Source: Datastream 
(a Refinitiv Product)

61

CEO single figure

2022
2021
2020
2019
2018
2017
2016
2015
2014
2013

P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson

Single figure of total
 remuneration
£000

Annual variable
 element award vs.
 maximum opportunity

Long term incentive
 vesting against
 maximum opportunity

1,161**
649
484
530
440
514
516
508
586*
416

66%
100%
15%
46%
 0%
48%
55%
56%
46%
10%

100%
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
0%
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

* This includes £105k in respect of the exercise of options which vested in 2007.
** This includes £411k vesting of 2019 PSP.

Percentage change in remuneration of Directors and employees
The following table shows the percentage change in remuneration of the Directors and employees of the business between  
the 2021 and 2022 financial years. 

2021/22
Salary/fees
Benefits
Bonus
2020/21
Salary/fees
Benefits
Bonus

Employee
 average

3%
2%
(33%)

2%
(12%)
296%

Executive Directors

Non-Executive Directors

P.D. Atkinson

I. Gray

A. Gulvanessian

J.W.F. Baird

R. McLellan

L.D. Whyte

10%
(17%)
44%

2%
0%
580%

5%
3%
35%

2%
27%
7,188%*

3%
–
–

2%
–
–

3%
–
–

2%
–
–

3%
–
–

2%
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

* I. Gray became an Executive Director in November 2020, therefore the bonus payable in 2020 was for one month of service, capped at 7.5%.

The legal requirement is only to provide details of employees of the parent company, Macfarlane Group PLC. However we have 
decided to voluntarily disclose the comparison in respect of details for all Group employees. 

Relative importance of spend on pay
The change in remuneration for all employees compared to dividends to shareholders is shown below:

Total employee pay
Dividend

2022
£000 

2021
£000

37,502
5,102

38,985*
4,293

Change

-4%
19%

* Includes £3,846,000 related to employees of the Labels business sold in December 2021.

CEO to employee pay ratio
The table below shows the ratio of total CEO remuneration to that of the lower quartile, median and upper quartile paid employee.

Financial year

Method

25th percentile
 pay ratio

50th percentile 
pay ratio

75th percentile
 pay ratio

2022

2021

2020

Option B

Option B

Option B

46.2:1

31.4:1

23.1:1

41.5:1

24.0:1

17.8 :1

15.8:1

17.5:1

14.9 :1

Notes to CEO to employee pay ratio
Option B, using the gender pay gap reporting data to identify the individuals who represent the three quartiles, was chosen as the 
methodology as this data was readily available on a Group-wide basis and is consistent with 2021.

Total remuneration for the CEO and for the individuals who represent the three quartiles was determined for the year to 31 December 
2022. The three individuals are all full-time employees and are considered to be representative of the 25th percentile, median and 
75th percentile pay levels in the Group.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information62 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Remuneration report
(continued)

Median pay ratios are reflective of Macfarlane Group’s policy of not paying excessive salaries to Executive Directors. The ratio has 
increased this year due to the vesting of the 2019 PSP award.

The table below shows the total pay and benefits and the salary component of total pay for the three quartiles.

Financial year

25th percentile

50th percentile

75th percentile

25th percentile

50th percentile

75th percentile

Salary component of total pay and benefits

Total pay and benefits

2022

£21,662

£26,719

£33,500

£25,135

£27,984

£73,643

Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 2023
As is more fully explained in the Remuneration Committee Chair’s summary statement introducing the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report, salaries for P.D. Atkinson and I. Gray at 1 January 2023 increased by 7% and 3% to £435,000 and £206,566 respectively. 

P.D. Atkinson’s pension contribution will reduce from 15% to 8% in 2023, in line with a phased reduction.

Executive Directors will be eligible to receive an annual bonus of up to 100% of base salary (2022: 100%), with 75% of salary based 
on PBT targets and 25% of salary based on personal objectives. 25% of the bonus will also be deferred, payable in shares, subject 
to a de minimis of £10,000. If the PBT threshold target is not achieved, payment of any element of the annual bonus is only payable 
at the discretion of the Committee. The precise PBT targets for 2023 are considered by the Board to be commercially sensitive. 
The nature of the targets includes continuing the business on its growth journey both organically and through targeted acquisition 
of quality protective packaging businesses. The main focus of the personal objectives are business growth; leadership development, 
ESG and executing earnings enhancing acquisitions.

Benefits will operate in an unchanged way from 2022.

The Remuneration Committee intends to make awards under the PSP based on the following principles:

•  An annual award over shares with a face value of up to 100% of salary (within the existing limit);
•  A fixed three-year performance period (with no re-testing);
•  A two-year post-vesting holding period; and
•  A performance condition based on earnings per share performance with a 25% threshold level for vesting and subject also to an 
‘underpin’ assessment by the Remuneration Committee that it must be satisfied regarding overall Group performance before 
vesting is confirmed.

The precise targets will be set by the Committee at the time of the award and will be disclosed in next year’s Directors’ 
Remuneration Report.

Details of the Remuneration Committee, advisers to the Committee and their fees
The Remuneration Committee currently comprises three independent Non-Executive Directors and the Company Chair. Details 
of the Directors who were members of the Committee during the year are disclosed on page 52. During the year under review, the 
Committee, where appropriate, sought advice and assistance from the Executive Directors in connection with carrying out its 
duties. The Company Secretary acts as the secretary to the Committee.

The Remuneration Committee used the services of FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP to advise on certain aspects of 
remuneration during 2022 and fees of £29,160 (2021: £16,713) were charged during the year for that advice. FIT’s fees were 
charged on the basis of that firm’s standard terms of business for advice provided. The Directors consider FIT Remuneration 
Consultants LLP to be independent of the Group and objective in their advice. FIT were appointed to advise the Committee  
in 2016 following a competitive tender process. FIT is a signatory to the Remuneration Consultants Group’s Code of Conduct.

Remuneration Committee’s reporting obligations
The Remuneration Committee considered its obligations under the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code and concluded that:

•  The Directors’ Remuneration Policy, approved by shareholders in May 2022, and our implementation of the Policy (including  

the use of PBT and personal performance measures for the annual bonus and EPS performance measures for the PSP) support 
the Company’s strategy.

•  The use of PBT and EPS measures reflect the Company’s focus on growing profits and our aims of motivating the Executive 

Directors to achieve a level of profitability that supports the Company paying an attractive level of dividend, balanced against 
the need to retain funds in the business to finance growth, make pension scheme contributions, fund acquisitions and meet 
capital expenditure requirements.

•  Remuneration for the Executive Directors remains appropriate and consistent with our policy of not paying excessive salaries. 

The Remuneration Policy operated as intended, rewarding executives for a resilient performance in 2022. 

63

In addition, the Committee addressed the six factors outlined in Provision 40 of the 2018 Code when determining the Executive 
Directors’ remuneration.

•  Clarity – Our Remuneration Policy is well understood by the Executive Directors and by those of our major independent 

shareholders, with whom we engaged with regards to the proposed amendments to our policy in 2022.

•  Simplicity – The Remuneration Committee is conscious that overly complex remuneration structures are less impactful than 
simple structures and has strived to keep Executive Directors’ pay as simple as possible, whilst also offering a competitive 
remuneration package.

•  Risk – Our Policy has been designed to ensure that it does not promote excessive risk taking (for example, the annual bonus  
and PSP are equally weighted, and operate on sliding performance scales, rather than relying on binary performance targets) 
and prevents ‘payment for failure’ through modest fixed remuneration and the use of stretching financial performance targets. 
The PSP is delivered in shares which vest after three years, with a further two-year holding period, ensuring a link to sustained, 
long-term performance. Malus and clawback apply to both the annual bonus and the PSP.

•  Predictability – Incentive plans for Executive Directors are subject to individual and overall caps, ensuring that the Remuneration 
Committee has control over levels of reward. The weighting of variable pay opportunity towards the PSP means that actual pay 
outcomes are highly aligned to the experience of shareholders.

•  Proportionality – All pay levels are appropriately proportionate, not excessive and reflect Macfarlane Group’s outlook and 

culture. Executive Directors’ fixed remuneration is set, after consideration of performance external benchmarks, at a level that  
is competitive but affordable for the Group, with variable pay linked to the achievement of stretching performance targets.
•  Alignment to culture – The performance targets which are used to measure both the annual bonus and the PSP are stretching, 

consistent with Macfarlane Group’s performance-led culture. We do not believe that variable pay should be paid for poor 
performance and have a long track record of setting robust performance targets.

The Remuneration Committee receives a report on pay and benefits across the Group which it considers when setting remuneration 
for Executive Directors. While employees are not directly consulted when setting Executive Directors’ remuneration, Laura Whyte 
acts as designated Non-Executive Director for employee engagement in addition to her role as Remuneration Committee Chair, 
and so the Remuneration Committee is fully updated on any views on remuneration which arise from the engagement process.

Whenever the Board has engaged with shareholders during the year, it has received supportive feedback, including on remuneration 
matters.

Statement of voting at the Annual General Meeting on 10 May 2022
The Directors’ Remuneration Report received the following votes from shareholders.

For
Against

Total number
 of votes

88,355,213
2,772,881

% votes cast

96.96%
3.04%

Total votes cast (for or against)

91,128,094

100.00%

Votes withheld

Total

37,746

91,165,840

Votes received on 10 May 2022 (including votes withheld) amounted to 57.77% of the issued share capital.

Statement of voting at the Annual General Meeting on 10 May 2022
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy received the following votes from shareholders.

For
Against

Total number
 of votes

88,218,747
2,903,465

% votes cast

96.81%
3.19%

Total votes cast (for or against)

91,122,212

100.00%

Votes withheld

Total

43,628

91,165,840

Votes received on 10 May 2022 (including votes withheld) amounted to 57.77% of the issued share capital.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information64 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Remuneration report
(continued)

Directors’ remuneration policy

The Directors’ Remuneration Policy for Executive and Non-Executive Directors for the three-year  
period expiring at the Company’s 2025 AGM, and which was approved by shareholders at the 2022  
AGM, can be found within the Company’s Annual Report and Accounts for 2021 which is available  
on the Company’s website at www.macfarlanegroup.com/investors/accounts.

65

Corporate governance

Macfarlane Group is committed to the 
principles of corporate governance set 
out in the Financial Reporting Council’s 
(‘FRC’) UK Corporate Governance  
Code issued in 2018 (‘the Code’). The 
Company’s compliance is set out in the 
narrative statement on pages 65 to 73 
and for Directors’ remuneration in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report on 
pages 56 to 64.

Compliance
The Company fully complied with all  
the Code provisions during 2022, with 
exception of:

•  Provision 10 which relates to the 
independence of Non-Executive 
Directors. One Non-Executive Director 
has served on the Board for more than 
nine years and this is explained in the 
Corporate Governance report on  
page 65.

•  Provision 38 which relates to alignment 

of Executive Directors pension 
contribution rates to those available to 
the workforce. The Executive Directors 
receive pension contributions equivalent 
to 8% of basic salary which is aligned to 
other senior managers but not the 
majority of the workforce.

The Company’s auditor, Deloitte LLP,  
is required to review whether the above 
statement reflects the Company’s 
compliance with the provisions of the 
Code specified for its review by the 
Financial Conduct Authority’s Listing 
Rules and to report if it does not reflect 
such compliance.

The Board
The current Board structure is in 
compliance with the Code, requiring 
companies outside the FTSE 350  
to have at least two independent  
Non-Executive Directors.

The Board currently comprises the  
Chair, three independent Non-Executive 
Directors and two Executive Directors. 
Directors’ names, and biographical details 
illustrating their range of experience and the 
benefit that each Director’s appointment 
brings to Macfarlane Group, are set out  
on page 52.

The Directors believe that the Board has an 
appropriate independent Non-Executive 
Director complement, with recent and 
relevant experience, which brings strong, 
independent judgement to the Board’s 
deliberations. The Non-Executive 
Directors contribute towards and 
challenge Group strategy as well as 
scrutinising performance in meeting 
agreed objectives and monitoring the 
reporting of performance. They satisfy 
themselves as to the integrity of the 
financial information including confirming 
that the financial controls, systems of risk 
management and governance structure 
are robust and defensible.

Non-Executive Directors have access  
to independent professional advice at  
the Group’s expense, subject to certain 
limits and procedures, when it is deemed 
necessary in order for them to effectively 
fulfil their responsibilities.

Details of Executive Directors’ service 
contracts are given in the Directors’  
Report with all Executive Directors’ service 
contracts having notice periods of one year.

The Company has maintained Directors’ and 
officers’ liability insurance cover throughout 
the financial year. The Company made 
qualifying third-party indemnity provisions 
for the benefit of Directors in 2009, and 
these have remained in force throughout 
2022 and to the date of this report.

The Board confirms that it considers  
and authorises any conflicts or potential 
conflicts of interest in accordance with 
the Group’s existing procedures. There 
were no conflicts of interest requiring 
consideration in 2022.

The Chair’s other commitments are 
shown in her biography on page 52.  
The Board is satisfied that these do not 
interfere with the performance of Group 
duties, which is based on a commitment  
of approx. 45 days per annum.

The Board considers its Non-Executive 
Directors, Bob McLellan, James Baird 
and Laura Whyte, to be independent 
both in character and judgement.  
None of these Directors:

•  Has been an employee of the Group 

within the last five years;

•  Has, or has had within the last three 

years, a material business 
relationship with the Group;

•  Receives remuneration other than  

a Director’s fee;

•  Has close family ties with any of the 

Group’s advisers, Directors or senior 
employees;

•  Holds cross-directorships or has 

significant links with other Directors 
through other companies or bodies; or
•  Represents a significant shareholder.

With the exception of Bob McLellan,  
no Non-Executive Director has served 
on the Board for more than nine years 
from the date of their first election. 
Bob McLellan was first elected to the 
Board on 7 May 2013 and has now 
served on the Board for more than  
9 years. The Board considers that  
the input provided by Bob McLellan, 
with his extensive packaging industry 
experience, remains both valuable  
and independent. The Board will keep 
under review the process of recruiting 
a suitable successor as candidates  
with an appropriate level of industry 
expertise are identified.

The balance of the Board’s skills  
and experience is kept under regular 
review. The Board’s succession plans 
recognise the need to consider wider 
diversity within the Group and in  
Board composition. In 2022, with the 
appointments of Aleen Gulvanessian 
as the Group’s first female Chair and 
Laura Whyte as a new Non-Executive 
Director, the Group has made good 
progress in increasing the female 
representation on the Board to 33%. 
We are also committed to continuous 
improvement in the sustainability both 
of our operations and of the products 
that we offer our customers. The 
Board recognises that both of these 
objectives are to the benefit of all 
stakeholders of the Group.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information66 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Corporate governance
(continued)

The roles of the Chair  
and Chief Executive
The division of responsibilities between 
the Chair and the Chief Executive is 
very clearly defined and has been 
approved by the Board. The Chair is 
responsible for running the Board, 
ensuring that all Directors receive 
sufficient and relevant information  
on financial, business and corporate 
issues prior to meetings to allow 
Directors to bring independent 
judgement to bear on all issues.  
The Chair facilitates the effective 
contribution of Non-Executive Directors 
and ensures effective communication 
channels with shareholders.

The Chief Executive’s responsibilities 
focus on managing the business and 
implementing the Group’s strategy.

Senior Independent Director
Bob McLellan is the Senior Independent 
Director. Shareholders may contact 
him directly if they feel their concerns 
are not being addressed and resolved 
through existing mechanisms for 
investor communication.

Re-election of Directors
At each AGM, all Directors fall due  
to retire and, being eligible, offer 
themselves for election. Directors’ 
service contracts and letters of 
appointment will be available for 
shareholder review prior to the  
AGM on 9 May 2023.

Subject to the Company’s Articles of 
Association, the Companies Act and 
satisfactory performance evaluation, 
Non-Executive Directors are appointed 
for an initial period of three years. 
Before the third and sixth anniversary 
of the Non-Executive Director’s first 
appointment, the Chair will discuss 
with the Director whether a further 
three-year term is to be served. 

Company Secretary
James Macdonald, the Company 
Secretary, is responsible for advising  
the Board through the Chair on all 
matters relating to corporate 
governance. Under the direction of  
the Chair, the Company Secretary’s 
responsibilities include ensuring good 
information flows within the Board and 

its committees and between executive 
management and Non-Executive 
Directors. The Company Secretary  
also facilitates induction and assists with 
professional development for the Board. 
All Directors have access to the advice 
and services of the Company Secretary.

The Articles of Association and the 
schedule of matters reserved for the 
Board provide that the appointment  
and removal of the Company Secretary  
is a matter for the Board as a whole.

Board procedures
The Group is controlled by the Board of 
Directors. The Board’s main roles are to 
set the Group’s strategic objectives, guide 
and support executive management in 
achieving these objectives, create value 
for and safeguard the interests of all 
shareholders within the appropriate legal 
and regulatory framework. The Board met 
eight (2021: seven) times during 2022 and 
individual attendance at those and the 
Board Committee meetings is set out  
in the table on the following page. 

Key members of the management team 
joined the meetings to further develop the 
Board’s understanding of the business. 

The Board has a formal schedule of 
matters reserved for its approval. The 
specific matters reserved for the Board 
include setting the Group’s strategy and 
approving an annual budget, reviewing 
management performance, approving 
acquisitions, divestments and major  
capital expenditure, monitoring returns on 
investment, reviewing the Group’s systems 
of internal control and risk management, 
setting and approving ESG objectives and 
monitoring progress and consideration  
of significant strategic, financing or ESG 
matters. The Board has delegated to 
executive management responsibility for 
the development and recommendation  
of strategic plans, including ESG strategy, 
for consideration by the Board, the 
implementation of the strategy and 
policies of the Group as determined by 
the Board, the delivery of the operating 
and financial plan, approval of capital 
expenditure below Board authority levels 
and the development and implementation 
of risk management systems.

Board agendas are set by the Chair, who 
consults with the Chief Executive and 
discusses the agendas with the Company 
Secretary. A programme of areas for 
discussion is maintained by the Company 
Secretary to ensure that all matters 
reserved for the Board and any other  
key issues are addressed at the 
appropriate time.

At each meeting, the Directors receive 
management information and reports 
from the Chief Executive and the Finance 
Director which, together with other papers, 
enables them to scrutinise the Group and 
management performance against agreed 
objectives. These and other regular 
reports and papers are circulated to the 
Directors in a timely manner in preparation 
for Board and Committee meetings  
and are supplemented by information 
specifically requested by the Directors 
from time to time.

Accountability
The Board is responsible for presenting  
a fair, balanced and understandable 
assessment of the Group’s position and 
prospects and asks the Audit Committee 
to consider and advise the Board of its view.

The Board considers that the Annual 
Report provides the information necessary 
for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
performance, business model and strategy.

The Directors’ Responsibilities Statement 
is set out on page 74.

Going concern
After making enquiries, the Directors 
have a reasonable expectation that the 
Company and the Group have adequate 
resources to continue in operational 
existence for at least the next twelve 
months from the date of this report.  
For this reason, they continue to adopt 
the going concern basis in preparing the 
financial statements. Given the economic 
uncertainties, the Directors have also 
extended their consideration of going 
concern with the review of additional 
scenario analyses set out in the Viability 
Statement on page 23. 

67

Board and Committee meetings
The number of Board and Committee 
meetings attended by each member 
during 2022 is shown in the table below.

for the year ahead. The Chair then holds 
individual meetings with each Director  
to review performance and set individual 
objectives.

Professional development
On appointment, all Directors complete 
an induction programme designed to give 
them a thorough understanding of the 
Group and its activities. They receive 
information about the Group, the matters 
reserved for the Board, the terms of 
reference and membership of the Board 
Committees, and the latest financial, other 
performance and ESG information. This is 
supplemented with visits to key locations 
and meetings with, and presentations 
from, senior management.

Board performance evaluation
The Board has established a formal 
process, led by the Chair, for an annual 
performance evaluation of the Board,  
its Committees and individual Directors. 
All Directors are made aware that their 
performance will be subject to regular 
evaluation. The Board has completed  
a self-assessment questionnaire  
developed to take account of the areas 
identified in the FRC ‘Guidance on Board 
Effectiveness’. This includes specific 
reference to strategic objectives and  
the performance and processes of the 
Board and all Board Committees.

Results are collated by the Company 
Secretary and reviewed to identify areas 
for improvement and confirm objectives 

The Chair meets with the Non-Executive 
Directors during the year without the 
Executive Directors present. The three 
Non-Executive Directors conduct an 
annual performance evaluation of the Chair.

Relationships with Shareholders
The Group maintains a corporate website 
(www.macfarlanegroup.com) containing 
a wide range of information of interest to 
institutional and private investors.

Detailed reviews of the performance, 
business model, ESG matters and 
financial position are included in the 
Strategic Report on pages 4 to 50 of this 
report. The Board uses this, together with 
the Chair’s Statement on pages 5 to 7  
and the remainder of the Report of the 
Directors, to present its assessment of 
the Group’s position and prospects.

The Chair seeks to maintain a regular 
dialogue with shareholders and gives 
feedback to the Board on issues raised. 
The Group has regular discussions with 
institutional shareholders, including 
meetings led by the Chief Executive  
and the Finance Director following the 
announcement of the annual results in 
February and the interim results in August. 
Individual requests for discussions from 
shareholders are considered.

The Board receives feedback on 
shareholder meetings, including broker 
feedback, for the meetings scheduled 
around the results’ announcements. 
The Senior Independent Director is 
available to meet with shareholders  
if they have concerns with contact 
through the normal channels of Chair, 
Chief Executive or Finance Director.

All Directors attend the AGM. All 
shareholders have an opportunity  
to raise questions with members of  
the Board on matters relating to the 
Group’s operations and performance 
during the meeting and to meet 
Directors after the formal proceedings 
have ended. Details of the resolutions 
to be proposed at the AGM can be 
found in the Notice of Meeting 
accompanying the Annual Report  
and Accounts. The Notice of Meeting  
is sent out more than 20 days in 
advance of the meeting. In line with the 
requirements of the Code, the results 
of proxy votes are disclosed at the 
AGM, notified to the Stock Exchange 
and made available on the Group 
website following the meeting.

Attendance by Directors at Board and Committee meetings during 2022

Stuart Paterson
Aleen Gulvanessian

Peter Atkinson 
Ivor Gray
Bob McLellan
James Baird 
Laura Whyte

Chair (to 30 September 2022)
Chair (from 1 October 2022)
Non-Executive Director
Chief Executive
Finance Director
Senior Independent Director
Non-Executive Director
Non-Executive Director

Board1

Audit
 Committee

Remuneration
Committee

Nominations
Committee

5 (5)
3 (3)
5 (5)
8 (8)
8 (8)
8 (8)
8 (8)
2 (3)

3 (3)2
1 (1)2
3 (3)
4 (4)2
4 (4)2
4 (4)
4 (4)
1 (1)

2 (2)
1 (1)
2 (2)
–
–
3 (3)
3 (3)
1 (1)

5 (5)
2 (2)
5 (5)
–
–
6 (7)
7 (7)
2 (2)

  Seven regular meetings and one special meeting to approve actions related to the pension scheme.

1 
2  The Chair, CEO and Finance Director attend but not as members of the Audit Committee.
Figures in brackets indicate the maximum number of meetings in 2022 for which the individual was a Board or Committee member. Where a Director cannot  
attend a Board or Committee meeting, any comments the Director has on the papers being reviewed at that meeting are relayed in advance for consideration.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information68 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Corporate governance
(continued)

Nominations  
Committee

The Nominations Committee  
during 2022 was as follows:

Stuart Paterson (Chair)  
(until 30 September 2022)

Aleen Gulvanessian (Chair) 
(from 1 October 2022)

Bob McLellan

James Baird

Laura Whyte 
(from 1 October 2022)

The Committee met 7 times  
during 2022.

Its terms of reference are  
available on the Group website  
(www.macfarlanegroup.com).

The principal work undertaken by the 
Nominations Committee in 2022 was 
to consider and recommend that the 
Company propose for re-election any 
Directors falling due for re-appointment 
at the AGM and to oversee the process 
to identify and appoint a new Chair  
and Non-Executive Director.

The Committee’s ongoing 
responsibilities include reviewing the 
structure, size and composition of the 
Board and giving full consideration to 
succession planning for both Executive 
and Non-Executive Directors and other 
senior executives. The Nominations 
Committee will continue to consider 
the mix of skills, experience and 
diversity that the Board requires and 
seek the appointment of Directors to 
meet its assessment of what is required 
to ensure that the Board is effective in 
discharging its responsibilities.

Following a Nominations Committee 
held in 2022 the Committee proposed 
that all Directors make themselves 
available for re-election at the AGM  
on 10 May 2022.

Following a Nominations Committee 
meeting on 22 August 2022, the 
Committee approved the appointment of 
Aleen Gulvanessian as Chair of the Board 
with effect from 1 October 2022. Aleen 
replaced Stuart Paterson, who retired on 
30 September 2022, after nine years as a 
Non-Executive Director including 5 years 
as Chair. This appointment was concluded 
following a review of the competencies 
required of a Chair, an extensive process 
which included interviewing and 
consideration of a number of external 
candidates, and an assessment of Aleen’s 
performance and her understanding of the 
Group businesses and its strategy since 
she joined the Board as a Non-Executive 
Director and Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee in October 2021. The 
Committee concluded that Aleen had all 
the competencies required of the role of 
Chair and demonstrated the appropriate 
knowledge of the Group’s businesses  
and strategy. 

Following a Nominations Committee 
meeting on 22 August 2022, the 
Committee approved the appointment of 
Laura Whyte as a Non-Executive Director 
with effect from 1 October 2022. Laura 
replaces Aleen Gulvanessian as Chair of 
the Remuneration Committee. This 
appointment was concluded following  
a review of the competencies required  
of a Non-Executive Director and Chair  
of Remuneration Committee and an 
extensive process was followed. The 
Committee concluded that Laura had all 
the competencies required of the role of  
a Non-Executive Director and Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee, particularly 
with her experience as HR Director of John 
Lewis. Laura’s profile is set out on page 52.

No Director is involved in any decisions 
regarding their own appointment or 
re-appointment.

Remuneration  
Committee

The Remuneration Committee  
during 2022 was as follows:

Laura Whyte (Chair)  
(from 1 October 2022)

Aleen Gulvanessian (Chair) 
(until 30 September 2022)

Bob McLellan

James Baird

Stuart Paterson 
(until 1 October 2022)

None of the members of the 
Remuneration Committee during 2022 
has any personal financial interests, other 
than as a shareholder, in the matters to be 
decided, conflicts of interests arising from 
cross-directorships or any day-to-day 
involvement in running the business.

The Committee met three times  
during 2022. Its terms of reference  
are available on the Group website  
(www.macfarlanegroup.com).

The principal work undertaken by the 
Remuneration Committee in 2022 was:

(a) 

 To review performance against 2022 
financial and personal objectives  
and to conclude on an appropriate 
performance related reward under the 
Annual Bonus Plan for senior executives 
including the Executive Directors;

(b)   To obtain approval for the new 

Remuneration Policy Statement, 
including proposed remuneration  
for Executive Directors, at the AGM  
on 10 May 2022; 
 To approve financial and personal 
objectives for 2023 in relation to the 
performance related Annual Bonus Plan;

(c) 

(d)   To consider awards of share-based 
incentives and determining the 
performance conditions for  
these awards;

(e)   To approve the vesting of shares  

to the Executive Directors after 
reviewing the performance achieved 
compared to the conditions set when 
the shares were awarded in 2019; and
 To approve the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report.

(f) 

The work of the Remuneration 
Committee is described in the  
Directors’ Remuneration Report and 
Remuneration Policy on pages 56 to 64.

69

Audit Committee

During 2022 the Audit Committee 
comprised:

James Baird (Chair)

Bob McLellan

Aleen Gulvanessian 
(until 30 September 2022)

Laura Whyte 
(from 1 October 2022)

James Baird was appointed as Chair of  
the Committee on 8 January 2018 given 
his relevant experience. The remaining 
Committee members, Bob McLellan  
and Laura Whyte, have a wide range of 
commercial experience as evidenced  
in their biographical details on page 52. 
The Committee Chair will be available  
to answer questions on any aspect of  
the Committee’s work at the AGM.

The Company Chair attends meetings  
to give the benefit of their relevant 
experience but is no longer a member  
of the Committee. Executive Directors, 
members of executive management, 
internal auditors and external auditors 
attend certain meetings at the invitation 
of the Committee Chair.

The Committee’s terms of reference  
are displayed on the Group website, 
(www.macfarlanegroup.com) and its 
principal oversight responsibilities cover 
the following five areas:

•  Internal control and risk management 
The Committee reviews annually the 
Group’s system of risk management 
and internal control and processes  
for evaluating and monitoring the  
risks facing the Group. The overall 
responsibility for the systems of  
internal control and for reviewing their 
effectiveness rests with the Board.

•  Internal audit 

The Committee monitors and reviews 
the effectiveness of the Group’s 
internal audit function and its terms of 
reference annually and recommends  
to the Board any changes required 
following its review. Reports from 
internal audit are considered at each 
meeting and the Committee actively 
engages in selecting and prioritising 
areas to be subject to audit.

•  Whistle-blowing 

The Committee monitors the 
Group’s arrangements by which staff 
may, in confidence, raise concerns 
about possible improprieties in 
matters of financial reporting and 
other areas including an external 
whistle-blowing service to take  
calls from employees.

•  External audit 

The Committee is responsible  
for monitoring the effectiveness  
of the external audit process and 
recommending to the Board the 
appointment, re-appointment and 
remuneration of the external auditor. 
It is responsible for ensuring that an 
appropriate relationship between 
the Group and the external auditor  
is maintained, including formal 
consideration of the independence of 
the external auditor. The Committee 
considers the framework for the 
supply of non-audit services by the 
external auditor and reviews any 
proposed non-audit services and fees.

•  Financial reporting 

The Committee monitors the 
integrity of the Group’s financial 
statements and the significant 
judgements contained therein 
including assessing the fair, balanced 
and understandable presentation 
within the reporting. The Committee 
also considers any other formal 
announcements relating to the 
Group’s performance. Further details 
are set out on the following pages.

Under an Audit and Assurance Policy 
formalised in 2022, the Executive 
Committee, senior managers and  
both internal and external assurance 
providers are required to provide the 
Audit Committee with regular updates 
on a range of topics to enable the 
Committee to form a view on the 
adequacy of the planned assurance 
work in relation to the Group’s principal 
risks (set out on page 24), risk mitigation 
plans and any significant new risks, 
themes or developments. The Group’s 
external auditors are expected to 
assess financial risks and the controls 
to migitate them, ie those likely to 
impact on their audit of the financial 
statements, with consideration of the 
risk profile and strategy of the business 

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information70 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Corporate governance
(continued)

Audit Committee 
(continued)

and the assessment performed by  
the Audit Committee. Internal audit is 
also required to form an independent 
view of the effectiveness of risk 
management and internal control 
arrangements where they are within 
the agreed scope of internal audit work.

The Audit Committee met four times 
during 2022. Its agenda is linked to 
events in the Group’s financial calendar.

The Committee meets privately with 
the external auditor at least once in 
each year. In 2022 the Audit Committee 
discharged its responsibilities by:

•  Reviewing its terms of reference;
•  Reviewing the Group’s draft financial 

statements and interim results 
statement prior to Board approval 
and reviewing the external auditor’s 
reports on the final results and draft 
financial statements;
•  Agreeing the continuing 

appropriateness of the Group’s 
accounting policies;

•  Monitoring compliance with 

International Financial Reporting 
Standards; 

•  Challenging the output from the 

Group-wide process used to identify, 
evaluate and mitigate risks and 
associated mitigating controls;
•  Reviewing the effectiveness of  

the Group’s internal controls and 
disclosures made in the Annual 
Report;

•  Reviewing the effectiveness of the 
external auditor at the conclusion  
of the 2021 audit;

•  Agreeing the programme of work  

for the internal audit function taking 
into account identified risks;

•  Discussing reports from the Head  
of Internal Audit on internal audit 
reports and management responses 
to proposals made in these reports, 
ensuring that the responses are 
actioned and completed on a  
timely basis;

•  Agreeing the external auditor’s plan  
for the audit of the Group financial 
statements which includes 
confirmation of auditor independence 
and approval of the engagement letter;
•  Reviewing and approving external audit 
fees and keeping the level and nature  
of non-audit fees under review; and
•  Reviewing and approving the Audit and 
Assurance Policy (referred to on page 69).

During 2022 the Audit Committee focused 
specifically on a number of areas relating to 
management judgements to ensure that:

•  There was sufficient stress testing of 

the Group’s financial position through a 
full range of possible scenarios to assess 
the Group’s going concern and viability;

•  There was a robust review of trade 

receivables and inventory provisioning  
to ensure it remained appropriate;

•  Appropriate provisions were recorded  
in respect of dilapidation and other 
property-related obligations under  
the Group’s agreed accounting policy;
•  The disclosures related to the use of  
an Alternative Performance Measure, 
being Operating profit before 
amortisation, and the presentation  
of reported profit with associated 
narrative were appropriate; and
•  The internal control environment  
had been maintained, the risk of 
inappropriate management override  
of controls was being monitored  
and where necessary mitigating or 
additional controls were implemented.

Following each Audit Committee meeting, 
copies of the minutes of the meetings are 
circulated to all Board Directors and are 
made available to the external auditors  
by the Company Secretary, who acts  
as Secretary to the Committee.

2022 financial statements
Certain accounting policies require  
key accounting judgements or involve 
particularly complex or subjective 
estimates or assumptions which can  
have a significant effect on the amounts 
recognised in the financial statements. 
The Audit Committee receives a report 
from the Finance Director for each 
reported set of results which summarises 
the principal judgements taken by 
executive management. The Committee 
discusses and challenges these 
judgements and considers the report 
together with the results of the external 

audit. The Committee then makes a 
recommendation to the Board on the 
suitability of the policies and judgements 
supporting the reported results. 

For the 2022 financial statements, the 
Committee considers the key areas  
of judgement to be:

Valuation of trade receivables
Trade receivables recorded in the Group’s 
balance sheet comprise a large number of 
individual balances. The Group reviews all 
trade receivables and provides against 
potentially irrecoverable items throughout 
the year, applying an Expected Credit Loss 
model and reviewing local judgements in 
their assessment of the provision required. 
Whilst every attempt is made to ensure 
that the Expected Credit Loss (‘ECL’) 
allowance held against trade receivables  
is as accurate as possible, there remains  
a risk that the provision may not match 
the level of debt which ultimately proves 
uncollectible. At 31 December 2022, the 
Group retained an ECL allowance held 
against trade receivables of £795,000 
(2021: £731,000) as set out in note 14.

The Audit Committee receives details of 
individual receivables > £25,000 twice in 
each year. The Committee reviews the 
extent to which year-end balances have 
been settled in 2023 to date, paying 
particular attention to receivables outwith 
terms and any bad debts written off, 
comparing this with similar analyses 
produced at previous reporting dates.  
This is then considered relative to the level 
of provision held against trade receivables.

Based on this analysis, the Committee  
is satisfied that it has challenged 
management’s assumptions and that  
the level of provision and the disclosures  
of items beyond terms is appropriate.

Pension scheme surplus/(deficit)
A net asset/liability is recorded at each 
reporting date equivalent to the surplus/
deficit on the Group’s defined benefit 
pension scheme. This asset/liability is 
determined in conjunction with advice 
from the pension scheme actuary and  
can fluctuate significantly based on a 
number of assumptions, some linked  
to market-related factors outwith the 
control of management. The main 
actuarial assumptions that impact  
the surplus are set out in note 24. 
Investments are valued at bid price.

71

The Audit Committee has debated the 
assumptions used to determine the 
liabilities in accordance with guidance from 
the pension schemes actuarial adviser and 
has satisfied itself that the assumptions 
used fall within an acceptable range 
reflecting the duration of liabilities in 
Macfarlane Group’s defined benefit 
pension scheme.

The pension scheme surplus calculated 
by the actuary and the related disclosures 
are based on these assumptions and the 
components of the movement in the 
surplus in 2022 have been explained to the 
Committee’s satisfaction. The sensitivities 
to movements in the key underlying 
assumptions are set out in note 24.  
The Committee is also satisfied that the 
surplus can be recognised as an asset 
based on legal opinion received, details  
of which are set out in note 24.

Accordingly the Committee is satisfied 
that it has challenged management’s 
assumptions and the reporting of the 
pension scheme surplus is appropriate.

Accounting treatment of acquisitions 
Acquired businesses are measured at the 
date of acquisition as the aggregate fair 
value of assets and liabilities. The excess 
of the cost of acquisition over the fair 
value of the identifiable net assets is 
classified as goodwill. The Committee 
reviews this process for each acquisition 
undertaken and discusses the 
methodology and assumptions used  
with management. Having reviewed  
the acquisition accounted for in 2022 
including a review of the Purchase Price 
Allocation and measurement of the 
likelihood of contingent consideration 
being payable based on facts that existed 
at the acquisition date, the Committee 
has concluded that it is satisfied with the 
basis of accounting in this area and the 
resulting measurements.

For all of these other matters the  
Audit Committee is satisfied with  
the approach taken.

The Audit Committee has reviewed the 
contents of this year’s Annual Report 
and Accounts and has advised the Board 
that, in its view, the report is fair, balanced 
and understandable and provides the 
information necessary for shareholders 
to assess the Group’s performance, 
business model and strategy.

The Committee monitors the  
Group’s arrangements by which  
staff may, in confidence, raise  
concerns about possible improprieties 
in matters of financial reporting and 
other areas, including an external 
whistle-blowing service to take  
calls from employees. Details of  
the arrangements are on the Group 
website (www.macfarlanegroup.com). 
All concerns are investigated at the 
earliest opportunity and the employee’s 
anonymity preserved wherever possible.

Relationship with external audit
The Audit Committee is responsible 
for the development, implementation 
and monitoring of the Group’s position 
on external audit. The Committee’s 
terms of reference assign oversight 
responsibility for monitoring the 
independence, objectivity and 
compliance of the external auditors with 
ethical and regulatory requirements to 
the Audit Committee, and day-to-day 
responsibility to the Finance Director. 
The Audit Committee ensures that  
the Board and external auditor have 
safeguards in place to prevent the 
auditor’s independence and objectivity 
being compromised. The external 
auditor also reports to the Committee 
on the actions taken to comply with 
professional and regulatory 
requirements and current best practice 
in order to maintain independence.

Consideration of other matters 
The Committee debates a number of 
other areas for each reporting period  
but does not consider these matters to  
be of similar significance to those above. 
For the 2022 financial statements, the 
main other areas included:

•  The Group’s Viability Statement includes 
‘severe but plausible’ scenarios applied  
in arriving at the conclusions made. The 
Committee reviewed these scenarios as 
well as the reverse stress testing applied 
to the model (as disclosed on page 23) 
and was satisfied with the assumptions 
and judgements applied and the 
statement made;

•  Goodwill is allocated to the cash 

generating units (‘CGUs’) expected  
to benefit from the synergies of the 
business combination for the purpose of 
impairment testing. The carrying values 
of goodwill and other operating assets 
for each CGU Grouping are reviewed  
at the half year and at the end of the 
financial year. The Committee reviews 
management’s approach to impairment 
testing for each CGU Grouping, including 
the related sensitivity analysis. The 
Committee was satisfied with the 
assumptions and judgements applied, 
concluding that there was no evidence 
of impairment of goodwill under all 
reasonable sensitivity scenarios.
•  The level of, and basis for, property-
related provisions at 31 December 
2022. The Committee considered  
the provisions recorded based on  
the circumstances of each relevant 
property and concluded that 
management’s assessment of the 
provision, supported, where significant, 
by external opinions from the Group’s 
property advisers, was appropriate;
•  The level of, and basis for, inventory 

provisions at 31 December 2022; and

•  The review of the Alternative 

Performance Measure (‘APM’), being 
Operating profit before amortisation, 
including the consideration of the 
narrative presentation of performance 
during the year, the consideration  
of disclosure of any non-recurring 
elements and the adequacy of 
supporting explanations and 
reconciliations to related statutory 
performance measures.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information72 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Corporate governance
(continued)

The Audit Committee monitors non-audit 
services, if any, provided to the Group by 
the external auditor, recognising that 
there may be certain non-audit work 
which the external auditor is best placed 
to undertake. The Committee’s policy  
is to keep all services provided by the 
external auditor under review to ensure 
the independence and objectivity of the 
external auditor, taking account of relevant 
professional and regulatory requirements. 
Non-audit work to be undertaken by the 
external auditor is approved by the Audit 
Committee in advance of the work being 
undertaken. Amounts paid to Deloitte LLP 
during 2022 for audit and other services 
are set out in note 2 to the financial 
statements. The only non-audit work 
undertaken by the external auditor in 
2022 related to the audit of the Report 
and Financial Statements of the Group’s 
defined benefit pension scheme for the 
year-ended 30 April 2022.

On conclusion of each year’s audit,  
the Audit Committee considers the 
effectiveness of the external auditor,  
in particular assessing the level of 
professional scepticism demonstrated 
throughout the audit process and in the 
challenge of management’s assumptions. 
Through the Committee meeting privately 
with the external auditor and in discussions 
between the external auditor and the 
Committee Chair, the actual performance 
of the auditor is compared to the annual 
audit plan originally presented to and 
agreed by the Committee.

Audit Committee 
(continued)

Each year the Audit Committee 
considers and agrees the scope of the 
audit proposed by the external auditor, 
including coverage of identified risk 
areas. In their review of the 2022 audit 
scope, the Committee requested that 
the external auditors report on the 
following additional areas:

a) 

b) 

c) 

 Compliance of receivables and 
inventories provisioning with the 
Group’s approved accounting 
policies;
 The suitability of property-related 
provisions, including the results  
of independent discussions 
conducted by the external auditor 
with the Group’s property adviser  
to corroborate underlying 
assumptions; and
 The appropriateness of  
disclosures related to the Alternative 
Performance Measure, Operating 
profit before amortisation, including 
the consideration of the narrative 
presentation of performance  
during the year, the disclosure of  
any non-recurring elements and the 
adequacy of supporting explanations 
and reconciliations to related 
statutory performance measures.

The external auditors reported to  
the Committee on all of these areas  
on conclusion of the 2022 audit. No 
adjustments were made to the 2022 
financial statements or to the Group’s 
internal controls following the external 
auditors report.

The Committee notes that there are  
no contractual obligations to restrict the 
choice of external auditor. In accordance 
with best practice, the audit partner 
from the external firm rotates off the 
audit engagement every five years. 
The 2022 audit is the fourth year for 
the current audit partner.

Risk management  
and internal control

The Board is responsible for the Group’s 
system of internal control and for reviewing 
its effectiveness. It is management’s role 
to implement the Board’s policies on risk 
and control through the design and 
operation of appropriate internal control 
systems. Such systems are designed to 
manage rather than eliminate the risk of 
failure to achieve business objectives and 
by their nature can only provide reasonable 
and not absolute assurance against 
material misstatement or loss.

The Board confirms that an ongoing 
process for identifying, evaluating and 
managing the significant risks faced by 
the Group was in place in accordance with 
the principles of the Code and the related 
guidance. The process was in place 
throughout 2022 and has continued to 
the date of approval of the Annual Report 
and Accounts. 

The Board regularly reviews the Group’s 
system of internal control, utilising,  
where appropriate, the work of the Audit 
Committee. The Board’s monitoring 
covers all controls including financial, 
operational and compliance controls  
and risk management. 

The key elements of the internal control 
process are:

•  Formal Board reporting on a monthly 

basis by the Executive;

•  Formal Board approval of the annual 

budget;

•  Monthly and annual financial control 

checklists submitted by each  
business unit;

•  Discussion by the Committee of the 
external auditor’s conclusions from  
its annual audit; 

•  Completion of Internal Audit work  

in accordance with an agreed annual 
plan, with all reports and related 
recommendations reviewed by the 
Audit Committee after discussion  
with executive management; and
•  A robust risk assessment process  

as set out below.

73

Each business’s risk register is kept under 
review during regular review meetings in 
each business. The Board considers in 
detail specific risks from the register at 
each Board meeting and annually carries 
out a review of the risks facing the Group, 
ensuring that management has identified 
and implemented appropriate controls, 
which are acceptable to the Board, to 
address these risks.

Since 2009, Internal Audit has been staffed 
in-house. Certain parts of the internal audit 
plan may be outsourced when specific 
expertise is required. The Committee 
challenges and agrees the annual internal 
audit plan, receives reports on internal 
audit issues raised, a six-monthly update 
and an annual report from the Head of 
Internal Audit. The risk register is taken 
into account in setting the Internal Audit 
plan each year.

The Audit Committee receives regular 
reports on cyber security matters in 
recognition of the importance of having 
robust cyber security measures in place as 
part of the controls framework. Monitoring 
reviews and compliance audits are 
undertaken with the involvement of 
external specialists to ensure that 
employees, customers and suppliers are 
protected to the extent practical from  
the impact of cyber security breaches.

During the course of its review of the 
system of internal control, the Board  
has not identified, nor been advised of  
any failings or weaknesses which it has 
determined to be significant. No significant 
corrective actions are outstanding. 

The Directors have continued to review 
the effectiveness of the Group’s system 
of financial and non-financial controls.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information74 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect  
of the Annual Report and the financial statements

The Directors are responsible for 
preparing the Annual Report and the 
Group and parent Company financial 
statements in accordance with 
applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors  
to prepare Group and parent Company 
financial statements for each financial 
year. Under that law the Directors are 
required to prepare the Group financial 
statements in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting 
Standards as adopted by the United 
Kingdom and have also chosen to 
prepare the parent Company financial 
statements in accordance with 
Financial Reporting Standard 101 
‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’.

Under company law the Directors must 
not approve the financial statements 
unless they are satisfied that they give  
a true and fair view of the state of affairs 
of the Group and parent Company and 
of their profit or loss for that period. 

In preparing the parent Company 
financial statements, the Directors  
are required to: 

•  select suitable accounting policies 
and then apply them consistently;
•  make judgements and accounting 
estimates that are reasonable and 
prudent;

•  state whether Financial Reporting 
Standard 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure 
Framework’ has been followed, 
subject to any material departures 
disclosed and explained in the 
financial statements; and

•  prepare the financial statements on 
the going concern basis, unless it is 
inappropriate to presume that the 
Company will continue in business.

In preparing the Group financial 
statements, International Accounting 
Standard 1 requires that the Directors: 

•  properly select and apply accounting 

policies;

•  present information, including 

accounting policies, in a manner that 
provides relevant, reliable, comparable 
and understandable information;

•  provide additional disclosures  

when compliance with the specific 
requirements in IFRSs are insufficient to 
enable users to understand the impact 
of particular transactions, other events 
and conditions on the entity’s financial 
position and financial performance; and
•  make an assessment of the Company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern.

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that are 
sufficient to show and explain the 
Company’s transactions and disclose  
with reasonable accuracy at any time the 
financial position of the Company and 
enable them to ensure that the financial 
statements comply with the Companies 
Act 2006. They are also responsible for 
safeguarding the assets of the Company 
and hence for taking reasonable steps  
for the prevention and detection of fraud 
and other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the corporate 
and financial information included on  
the Company’s website. Legislation  
in the United Kingdom governing the 
preparation and dissemination of  
financial statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions.

Responsibility statement of the Directors 
in respect of the annual financial report
We confirm that to the best of our 
knowledge:

•  the financial statements, prepared in 
accordance with the relevant financial 
reporting framework, give a true and  
fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial 
position and profit or loss of the Company 
and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole;

•  the Strategic Report, incorporated  
into the Directors’ Report, includes  
a fair review of the development  
and performance of the business  
and the position of the Company  
and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole, together 
with a description of the principal risks 
and uncertainties that they face; and

•  the Annual Report and Accounts,  
taken as a whole, are fair, balanced  
and understandable and provide the 
information necessary for shareholders 
to assess the Company’s position and 
performance, business model and 
strategy.

This responsibility statement was 
approved by the Board on 23 February 
2023 and signed on its behalf by:

Peter D. Atkinson 
Chief Executive 

Ivor Gray
Finance Director

23 February 2023 

23 February 2023

 
Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC

75

Report on the audit of the financial statements

1. Opinion

In our opinion:

•  the financial statements of Macfarlane Group plc (the ‘parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) give a true 

and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 31 December 2022 and of the Group’s 
profit for the year then ended;

•  the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom adopted international 

accounting standards;

•  the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice, including Financial Reporting Standard 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’; and

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

We have audited the financial statements which comprise:

•  the consolidated income statement;
•  the consolidated statement of comprehensive income;
•  the consolidated and parent company balance sheets;
•  the consolidated and parent company statements of changes in equity;
•  the consolidated cash flow statement; and
•  the related notes 1 to 42.

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Group financial statements is applicable law,  
and United Kingdom adopted international accounting standards. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the 
preparation of the parent company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, including 
FRS 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).

2. Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities under those standards are further described in the auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial 
statements section of our report. 

We are independent of the Group and the parent company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit 
of the financial statements in the UK, including the Financial Reporting Council’s (the ‘FRC’s’) Ethical Standard as applied to listed 
public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. The non-audit 
services provided to the Group and parent company for the year are disclosed in note 2 to the financial statements. We confirm 
that we have not provided any non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard to the Group or the parent company.

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

3. Summary of our audit approach

Key audit matters

The key audit matter that we identified in the current year was:

 •  Business combinations: valuation and allocation of acquired intangible assets and valuation of 

contingent consideration

Materiality

Scoping

The materiality that we used for the Group financial statements was £975k which was determined  
on the basis of 4.9% of profit before tax.

Our audit covered 91% of the Group’s revenue, 96% of the Group’s net assets and 93% of the Group’s 
profit before tax.

Significant changes  
in our approach

There have been no significant changes in approach. Whilst this is consistent with the prior year, this key 
audit matter relates to the acquisition made in the current year.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information76 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC
(continued)

4. Conclusions relating to going concern
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the Directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the 
preparation of the financial statements is appropriate.

Our evaluation of the Directors’ assessment of the Group’s and parent company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern 
basis of accounting included:

•  Comparing the underlying data and key assumptions to past performance on the assumptions applied;
•  Assessing the financing facilities that are in place in the year including the repayment terms and covenants that are in place,  

and assessing whether these have been appropriately reflected in the model; 

•  Evaluating the sophistication of the model used to prepare the forecasts, testing the clerical accuracy of those forecasts  

and considering the historical accuracy of the forecasts prepared by the Directors;

•  Assessing the likelihood of the downside scenarios and sensitivities performed by the Directors; and 
•  Assessing the adequacy of the going concern disclosures. 

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, 
individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group’s and parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern  
for a period of at least twelve months from when the financial statements are authorised for issue.

In relation to the reporting on how the Group has applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, we have nothing material to add  
or draw attention to in relation to the Directors’ statement in the financial statements about whether the Directors considered  
it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting.

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the Directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections  
of this report.

5. Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial 
statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to 
fraud) that we identified. These matters included those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation 
of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team.

These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion 
thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

5.1. Business combinations: valuation and allocation of acquired intangible assets and valuation of contingent consideration 

Key audit 
matter 
description

The Group acquired PackMann Gessellschaft für Verpackungen und Dienstleistungen mbH (‘PackMann’)  
in the year for total consideration of £5.3m. Goodwill of £3.0m and other intangible assets of £1.4m were 
recognised on acquisition. No contingent consideration has been recognised as the Directors do not consider 
it probable that any amount will be payable (maximum payable of £1.5m).

How the scope 
of our audit 
responded to 
the key audit 
matter

The Directors have performed a purchase price allocation exercise to allocate consideration in excess of the net 
assets to goodwill and other intangibles. 

Given the judgement involved in valuing acquired intangible assets and in forecasting post-acquisition performance, 
we have identified a potential for fraud in relation to the valuation and allocation of acquired intangible assets, 
and of the valuation of contingent consideration.

Business combinations are included within note 23 to the financial statements. The Audit Committee’s 
consideration in respect of this risk is included on page 71.

The audit procedures we performed in respect of this matter included:

•  Gaining an understanding of the process over the price allocation and contingent consideration calculation, 

and gaining an understanding of the relevant controls;

•  Reviewing share purchase agreements to assess whether each acquisition has been accounted for correctly  

in the financial statements;

•  Engaging with our valuation specialists to understand the inputs and methodology and assess the assumptions 

used by the Directors;

•  Challenging the assumptions for the inputs to the calculations with reference to comparable Company benchmarks;
•  Assessing the accuracy of forecast revenues used in the calculations and determination that the contingent 

consideration will not be payable; 

•  Evaluating the assessment of the presence of further intangible assets not identified; and
•  Assessed the forecast of post-acquisition performance and valuation of the contingent consideration.

Key 
observations

We concluded that the assumptions made by the Directors in determining the valuation and allocation of acquired 
intangible assets, and the valuation of contingent consideration are reasonable.

77

6. Our application of materiality

6.1. Materiality
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that makes it probable that the economic 
decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable person would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in planning the scope  
of our audit work and in evaluating the results of our work.

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

Group financial statements

Parent company  
financial statements

Materiality

£975k (2021: £865k)

£488k (2021: £433k)

Profit before tax  
£19,934k

Basis for 
determining 
materiality

4.9% of profit before 
tax (2021: 4.6% of  
profit before tax).

Rationale for  
the benchmark 
applied

We have used profit 
before tax as the 
benchmark for our 
determination of 
materiality as we 
consider this to be  
the key performance 
metric for the Group 
and one which is a key 
metric to analysts  
and investors given  
the prominence in  
the annual report. 

0.7% of net assets (2021: 0.6% 
of net assets), which is capped 
at 50% (2021: 50%) of Group 
materiality.

The parent company holds  
the investments in the Group 
subsidiaries, the value of which 
is the key metric for the users  
of the financial statements.  
As statutory materiality would 
have been higher than the 
component materiality, we have 
capped materiality to be 50% of 
Group materiality being £488k. 
50% is deemed appropriate 
based on the Company only 
contribution to the Group.

Profit before tax

Group materiality

Group materiality

Component 
materiality range

Audit Committee 
reporting 
threshold £48k

6.2. Performance materiality
We set performance materiality at a level lower than materiality to reduce the probability that, in aggregate, uncorrected and 
undetected misstatements exceed the materiality for the financial statements as a whole. 
Group financial statements

Parent company financial statements

Performance materiality

70% (2021: 70%) of Group materiality

70% (2021: 70%) of parent company materiality 

Basis and rationale for 
determining performance 
materiality

In determining performance materiality, we considered the following factors: 

•  Our risk assessment, including the quality of the control environment, and that we 
considered it appropriate to rely on controls over certain business processes; and

•  Our past assessment of the audit, including consideration of the number and level  

of corrected and uncorrected misstatements identified in prior periods.

6.3. Error reporting threshold
We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to the Committee all audit differences in excess of £48k (2021: £43k),  
as well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to the 
Audit Committee on disclosure matters that we identified when assessing the overall presentation of the financial statements.

7. An overview of the scope of our audit
7.1. Identification and scoping of components
Our Group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of the Group and its environment through discussion with IT, internal 
audit, and the Group and component finance teams and by performing walkthroughs of processes across each of these areas, 
including Group-wide controls, and assessing the risk of material misstatement at a Group level. 

For components deemed significant to the Group, full scope audit procedures were performed to materiality levels applicable  
to each component, which was lower than the Group materiality level and ranged from £488k to £877k (2021: £433k to £797k). 
Components deemed significant are as follows:

•  Macfarlane Group UK Limited
•  Nelsons for Cartons & Packaging Limited
•  GWP Holdings Limited

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information78 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC
(continued)

This provided audit coverage of over 91% (2021: 91%) of the Group’s revenue, 96% (2021: 97%) of the Group’s net assets and 93% 
(2021: 90%) of the Group’s profit before tax. 

Revenue

9%

Profit before tax

Net assets

7%

4%

Full audit scope

Review at Group level

91%

93%

96%

The remaining non-significant components were subject to analytical reviews. Our audit work on these components was executed 
at Group materiality. 

At the Group level, we also tested the consolidation process. 

All work on the significant components and consolidation process was performed by the Group engagement team. 

7.2. Our consideration of the control environment
The Group operates an IT system, Enterprise 7, which underpins the financial reporting processes. We planned to rely on the 
relevant IT controls associated with this system and the relevant controls within the following business processes: revenue, trade 
receivables, expenditure and trade payables. As such, we obtained an understanding of and tested these controls. Even though 
we identified deficiencies, after performing additional procedures, we were able to rely on the controls associated with the system 
and within all business processes.

The Audit Committee discusses their review of the effectiveness of risk management and internal control on pages 72 to 73.

7.3. Our consideration of climate-related risks
In planning our audit, we have considered the potential impact of climate change on the Group’s business and its financial statements. 
We have considered management’s own assessment of the related risks and opportunities as described on page 34, together  
with our cumulative knowledge and experience of the Group and environment in which it operates. The Directors have assessed 
that climate change does not have a significant impact on the financial statements as disclosed within the accounting policies.  
We performed our own risk assessment including inspecting the Group’s risk register and Board minutes and did not identify any 
additional risks of material misstatement. 

We have read the disclosures in relation to climate change made in the other information within the annual report and ascertained 
whether the disclosures are materially consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge obtained during our audit. 

8. Other information
The other information comprises the information included in the annual report (including the Chair’s Statement, Macfarlane Group 
Business Model and Strategy, Finance Review, Viability Statement, Sustainability Report, Report of the Directors, Remuneration 
Report, Corporate Governance Report and Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities), other than the financial statements and our 
auditor’s report thereon. The Directors are responsible for the other information contained within the annual report. 

Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated 
in our report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent 
with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated.

If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives 
rise to a material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude 
that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact.

We have nothing to report in this regard.

79

9. Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the statement of Directors’ responsibilities, the Directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial 
statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the Directors determine is 
necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s and the parent company’s ability  
to continue as a going concern, disclosing as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis  
of accounting unless the Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent company or to cease operations, or have  
no realistic alternative but to do so.

10. Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is  
a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material 
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, 
they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at:  
www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report.

11. Extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our 
responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which 
our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud is detailed below. 

11.1. Identifying and assessing potential risks related to irregularities
In identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement in respect of irregularities, including fraud and non-compliance with 
laws and regulations, we considered the following:

•  the nature of the industry and sector, control environment and business performance including the design of the Group’s 

remuneration policies, key drivers for Directors’ remuneration, bonus levels and performance targets;

•  results of our enquiries of management, internal audit, and the audit committee about their own identification and assessment 

of the risks of irregularities; 

•  any matters we identified having obtained and reviewed the Group’s documentation of their policies and procedures relating to:
  –  identifying, evaluating and complying with laws and regulations and whether they were aware of any instances of non-compliance;
  –  detecting and responding to the risks of fraud and whether they have knowledge of any actual, suspected or alleged fraud;
  –  the internal controls established to mitigate risks of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations;
•  the matters discussed among the audit engagement team and relevant internal specialists, including valuations, pensions,  

and IT specialists regarding how and where fraud might occur in the financial statements and any potential indicators of fraud.

As a result of these procedures, we considered the opportunities and incentives that may exist within the organisation for fraud 
and identified the greatest potential for fraud in the following areas: business combinations – valuation and allocation of acquired 
intangible assets and valuation of contingent consideration. In common with all audits under ISAs (UK), we are also required to 
perform specific procedures to respond to the risk of management override.

We also obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory framework that the Group operates in, focusing on provisions  
of those laws and regulations that had a direct effect on the determination of material amounts and disclosures in the financial 
statements. The key laws and regulations we considered in this context included the UK Companies Act, Listing Rules, pensions 
legislation, and Tax Law.

In addition, we considered provisions of other laws and regulations that do not have a direct effect on the financial statements  
but compliance with which may be fundamental to the Group’s ability to operate or to avoid a material penalty. These included  
UK Employment and Labour Laws.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information80 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC
(continued)

11.2. Audit response to risks identified
As a result of performing the above, we identified business combinations: valuation and allocation of acquired intangible assets as 
a key audit matter related to the potential risk of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations. The key audit matters section 
of our report explains the matter in more detail and also describes the specific procedures we performed in response to that key 
audit matter. 

In addition to the above, our procedures to respond to risks identified included the following:

•  reviewing the financial statement disclosures and testing to supporting documentation to assess compliance with provisions  

of relevant laws and regulations described as having a direct effect on the financial statements;

•  enquiring of management, the audit committee and external legal counsel concerning actual and potential litigation and claims;
•  performing analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships that may indicate risks of material 

misstatement due to fraud;

•  reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance, reviewing internal audit reports and reviewing correspondence 

• 

with HMRC; and
in addressing the risk of fraud through management override of controls, testing the appropriateness of journal entries and 
other adjustments; assessing whether the judgements made in making accounting estimates are indicative of a potential bias; 
and evaluating the business rationale of any significant transactions that are unusual or outside the normal course of business.

We also communicated relevant identified laws and regulations and potential fraud risks to all engagement team members including 
internal specialists and remained alert to any indications of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations throughout the audit.

81

Report on other legal and regulatory requirements

12. Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006

In our opinion the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance  
with the Companies Act 2006.

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:

•  the information given in the strategic report and the Directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial 

statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and

•  the strategic report and the Directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and the parent company and their environment obtained in 
the course of the audit, we have not identified any material misstatements in the strategic report or the Directors’ report.

13. Corporate Governance Statement
The Listing Rules require us to review the Directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and that part of  
the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the Group’s compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance 
Code specified for our review.

Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the Corporate 
Governance Statement is materially consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge obtained during the audit: 

•  the Directors’ statement with regards to the appropriateness of adopting the going concern basis of accounting and any 

material uncertainties identified set out on page 66;

•  the Directors’ explanation as to its assessment of the Group’s prospects, the period this assessment covers and why the 

period is appropriate set out on page 66;

•  the Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 74;
•  the Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks set out on page 72;
•  the section of the annual report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and internal control 

systems set out on page 69; and

•  the section describing the work of the audit committee set out on page 69. 

14. Matters on which we are required to report by exception
14.1. Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been 

received from branches not visited by us; or

•  the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.

14.2. Directors’ remuneration
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our opinion certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration have 
not been made or the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited is not in agreement with the accounting records  
and returns.

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information82 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC
(continued)

15. Other matters which we are required to address
15.1. Auditor tenure
Following the recommendation of the Audit Committee, we were appointed by the Board of Directors on 12 July 2019 to audit the 
financial statements for the year ending 31 December 2019 and subsequent financial periods. The period of total uninterrupted 
engagement including previous renewals and reappointments of the firm is 4 years, covering the years ending 31 December 2019 
to 31 December 2022.

15.2. Consistency of the audit report with the additional report to the audit committee
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the audit committee we are required to provide in accordance with 
ISAs (UK).

16. Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 
2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to 
state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume 
responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for 
the opinions we have formed. 

As required by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rule (DTR) 4.1.14R, these financial 
statements form part of the European Single Electronic Format (ESEF) prepared Annual Financial Report filed on the National 
Storage Mechanism of the UK FCA in accordance with the ESEF Regulatory Technical Standard (‘ESEF RTS’). This auditor’s report 
provides no assurance over whether the annual financial report has been prepared using the single electronic format specified in 
the ESEF RTS. 

David Sweeney CA
For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP 
Statutory Auditor 
Glasgow, United Kingdom

23 February 2023

 
Consolidated income statement
For the year ended 31 December 2022

83

Continuing operations
Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses

Operating profit
Finance costs

Profit before tax
Tax

Note

2022
£000

2021
£000

1

2
4

5

290,431
192,374

264,465
174,998

98,057
10,736
65,825

21,496
1,562

19,934
4,210

89,467
8,651
60,761

20,055
1,390

18,665
4,917

Profit for the year from continuing operations

20

15,724

13,748

Discontinued operations
Loss for the year from discontinued operations

Profit for the year

Earnings per share from continuing operations

Basic

Diluted

Earnings per share from continuing and discontinued operations

Basic

Diluted

6

8

8

(87)

(1,150)

15,637

12,598

9.94p

9.84p

9.89p

9.78p

8.71p

8.62p

7.98p

7.90p

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information84 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
For the year ended 31 December 2022

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss
Foreign currency translation differences
Items that will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax recognised in other comprehensive income
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax

Other comprehensive (expense)/income for the year, net of tax
Profit for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year

Note

20

24

18

2022
£000

2021
£000

45

(82)

21
–

(120)

8,212

(2,054)
88

(16)
15,637

6,126
12,598

15,621

18,724

Consolidated statement of changes in equity
For the year ended 31 December 2022

85

Share
capital
£000

Share
premium
£000

Revaluation
reserve
£000

Own 
shares
£000

Translation
reserve
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

Total
£000

Note

At 1 January 2021

39,453

13,148

70

Comprehensive income
Profit for the year
Foreign currency translation differences
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with shareholders
Dividends
Share-based payments

Total transactions with shareholders

At 31 December 2021

Comprehensive income
Profit for the year
Foreign currency translation differences
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability

Total comprehensive income

20
24
18
18

7
25

20
24
18

Transactions with shareholders
Dividends
New shares issued
Share-based payments

Total transactions with shareholders

7
19/20
25

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

39,453

13,148

70

–
–
–
–

–

–
131
–

131

–
–
–
–

–

–
425
–

425

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

At 31 December 2022

39,584

13,573

70

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
(7)
–

(7)

(7)

291

26,816

79,778

–
(120)
–
–
–

12,598
–
8,212
(2,054)
88

12,598
(120)
8,212
(2,054)
88

(120)

18,844

18,724

–
–

–

(4,293)
685

(4,293)
685

(3,608)

(3,608)

171

42,052

94,894

–
45
–
–

45

–
–
–

–

15,637
–
(82)
21

15,637
45
(82)
21

15,576

15,621

(5,102)
(549)
607

(5,102)
–
607

(5,044)

(4,495)

216

52,584 106,020

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information86 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Consolidated balance sheet
At 31 December 2022

Non-current assets
Goodwill and other intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use assets
Trade and other receivables
Deferred tax assets
Retirement benefit surplus

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Current tax asset
Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Current tax liabilities
Lease liabilities
Bank borrowings

Total current liabilities

Net current assets

Non-current liabilities
Deferred tax liabilities
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Lease liabilities

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Revaluation reserve
Own shares
Translation reserve
Retained earnings

Total equity

The financial statements of Macfarlane Group PLC, company registration number SC004221,  
were approved by the Board of Directors on 23 February 2023 and signed on its behalf by

Peter D. Atkinson 
Chief Executive 

Ivor Gray
Finance Director

Note

2022 
£000

2021
£000

10
11
12
14
18
24

13
14

15

75,685
7,863
33,938
38
105
10,199

74,902
6,101
34,718
35
19
8,267

127,828

124,042

22,608
59,347
675
5,706

88,336

21,269
58,541
–
12,315

92,125

1

216,164

216,167

16
21

17
15

18
16
21
17

1

1

19
20
20
20
20
20

54,577
1,769
304
6,641
9,143

72,434

60,975
1,730
771
6,364
9,840

79,680

15,902

12,445

8,222
–
1,560
27,928

7,472
3,695
1,848
28,578

37,710

41,593

110,144

121,273

106,020

94,894

39,584
13,573
70
(7)
216
52,584

106,020

39,453
13,148
70
–
171
42,052

94,894

 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated cash flow statement
For the year ended 31 December 2022

87

Profit/(loss) before tax from:
Continuing operations
Discontinued operations

Total operations
Adjustments for:
Amortisation of intangible assets
Impairment of goodwill in discontinued operations
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Loss on disposal of subsidiaries
Share-based payment expense
Finance costs

Operating cash flows before movements in working capital
Decrease/(increase) in inventories
Decrease/(increase) in receivables
(Decrease)/increase in payables
(Decrease)/increase in provisions
Pension scheme contributions (less current service cost) 

Cash generated from operations
Income taxes paid
Interest paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities 

Investing activities
Acquisitions
Proceeds from sale of subsidiaries
Proceeds from disposal of property, plant and equipment
Purchase of property, plant and equipment

Cash outflow from investing activities

Financing activities
Dividends paid
(Repayment)/drawdown of bank borrowing facility

Repayment of lease obligations

Cash outflow from financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Note

2022 
£000

2021
£000

10

11
12

4

23

7

19,934
(87)

19,847

3,577
–
1,498
7,542
71
87
607
1,562

34,791
1,025
285
(9,027)
(249)
(1,838)

24,987
(5,251)
(1,738)

17,998

(8,655)
166
181
(3,285)

(11,593)

(5,102)
(865)

(7,215)

(13,182)

(6,777)
12,123

5,346

18,665
(938)

17,727

3,311
987
1,989
7,282
43
232
685
1,390

33,646
(4,848)
(7,892)
8,905
1,884
(1,533)

30,162
(4,975)
(1,383)

23,804

(12,238)
5,212
199
(2,132)

(8,959)

(4,293)
3,889

(7,539)

(7,943)

6,902
5,221

12,123

There is no material impact of foreign exchange rate differences on the cash and cash equivalents balance at the end of the 
current or preceding financial year.

Reconciliation to consolidated cash flow statement
Cash and cash equivalents per the consolidated balance sheet
Bank overdraft

Balances per consolidated cash flow statement

2022 
£000

2021
£000

5,706
(360)

5,346

12,315
(192)

12,123

Bank overdrafts are included in cash and cash equivalents because they form an integral part of the Group’s cash management.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information88 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Accounting policies
For the year ended 31 December 2022

Basis of preparation
Macfarlane Group PLC is a public company listed on the London Stock Exchange (‘the Company’), incorporated and domiciled 
in the United Kingdom and registered in Scotland. The Company’s registered office is 3 Park Gardens, Glasgow, G3 7YE.

Basis of accounting
The principal activities of the Company and its subsidiaries (‘the Group’) and the nature of the Group’s operations are set out in 
the strategic report on pages 4 to 50. The 2022 financial statements have been prepared in accordance with United Kingdom 
adopted international accounting standards. These consolidated financial statements are presented in Sterling, which is the 
Company’s functional currency. All amounts have been rounded to the nearest thousand, unless otherwise indicated.

The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis. The revaluation reserve relates to a period before 
transition to IFRS.

Going concern
The Directors, in their consideration of going concern, have reviewed the Group’s future cash flow forecasts and profit 
projections, which they believe are based on an appropriate assessment of the market and past experience. The Group’s 
business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and financial position are  
set out in the Strategic Report on pages 4 to 50.

The Group’s principal financial risks in the medium term relate to liquidity and credit risk. Liquidity risk is managed by ensuring 
that the Group’s day-to-day working capital requirements are met by having access to banking facilities with suitable terms 
and conditions to accommodate the requirements of the Group’s operations. The Group has a committed borrowing facility 
of £30m with Lloyds Banking Group PLC in place until December 2025. The facility bears interest at normal commercial rates 
and carries standard financial covenants in relation to interest cover and levels of headroom over trade receivables. Credit risk 
is mitigated by applying considerable rigour in managing the Group’s trade receivables. The Directors believe that the Group  
is adequately placed to manage its financial risks effectively, despite any economic uncertainty.

The Directors are of the opinion that the Group’s cash flow forecasts and profit projections, which they believe are based on a 
prudent assessment of the market and past experience taking account of reasonably possible changes in trading performance 
given current market and economic conditions, show that the Group should be able to operate within the current facility and 
comply with its banking covenants. The Directors have modelled a range of scenarios, including a central case, a downside 
scenario, a severe but plausible downside and a reverse stress test, over a three-year horizon. Details are set out in the Viability 
statement review on page 23.

After making enquiries, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company and the Group have adequate resources 
to continue in operational existence for a period extending at least the next twelve months from the date of approval of these 
financial statements. For this reason, they continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements.

Critical judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
The preparation of financial statements requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts 
reported for assets and liabilities as at the balance sheet date and the amounts reported for revenues and expenses during the 
year. Due to the nature of estimation, the actual outcomes may well differ from these estimates. The Directors have assessed 
the impact of climate change and consider that this does not have a significant impact on these financial statements.

Critical judgements
As detailed in note 21, property provisions of £3.3m have been recognised as at 31 December 2022 (2021: £3.6m), 
representing the Directors’ best estimate of dilapidations on property leases. The Directors have made the judgement that  
no provision is required for certain property leases where there is no intention to exit, having considered a number of factors 
including the extent of modifications to the property, the terms of the lease agreement, and the condition of the property.

No other significant critical judgements have been made in the current or prior year.

Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The key sources of estimation uncertainty that have a significant effect on the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities are 
discussed below:

Retirement benefit obligations 
The determination of any defined benefit pension scheme asset or liability is based on assumptions determined with 
independent actuarial advice. The key assumptions used include discount rate and inflation rate assumptions, for which a 
sensitivity analysis is provided in note 24. The Directors consider that those sensitivities represent reasonable sensitivities 
which could occur in the next financial year.

89

Valuation of trade receivables 
The provision held against trade receivables considers an expected credit loss model and related estimates of recoverable 
amounts, as detailed in note 14. Whilst every attempt is made to ensure that the provision held against doubtful trade receivables 
is as accurate as possible, there remains a risk that the provision may not match the level of debt, which ultimately proves 
uncollectable. For illustration only, an increase in the average default rate of overdue trade receivables from 1.44% to 2.43% 
above the historic loss rates observed would lead to an increase of £540,000 in the provision required.

Alternative performance measures 
In measuring the financial performance and position, the financial measures used in certain limited cases include those which 
have been derived from the reported results in order to eliminate factors which due to their unusual nature and size distort 
year-on-year comparisons to a material extent and/or provide useful information to stakeholders. Where such items arise,  
the Directors will classify such items as separately disclosed and provide details of these items to enable users of the accounts 
to understand the impact on the financial statements.

To the extent that a measurement under Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (‘GAAP’) is adjusted for a separately 
disclosed item, this is referred to as an Alternative Performance Measure (‘APM’). We believe that the APM defined below,  
and the comparable GAAP measurement, provides a useful basis for measuring the financial performance and position. 

In addition to the various performance measures defined under IFRS the Group reports operating profit before amortisation 
as a measure to assist in understanding the underlying performance of the Group and its businesses when compared to similar 
companies. Operating profit before amortisation is not defined under IFRS and, as a result, does not comply with Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice (‘GAAP’) and is therefore known as an alternative performance measure. Accordingly, this 
measure, which is not designed to be a substitute for any of the IFRS measures of performance, may not be directly comparable 
with other companies’ alternative performance measures. Operating profit before amortisation is defined as operating profit 
before customer relationships and brand values amortisation reconciled in the table below.

Continuing operations

Operating profit before amortisation
Customer relationships/brand values amortisation

Operating profit

Year to 31
December
2022
£000

Year to 31
December
2021
£000

25,073
(3,577)

21,496

23,366
(3,311)

20,055

Net bank funds/(debt) also represents an Alternative Performance Measure as defined and reconciled to the statutory 
measure in note 22.

Changes in accounting policies in 2022
There are no new accounting policies applied in 2022 which have had a material effect on these accounts. In addition, the 
Directors do not consider that the adoption of new and revised standards and interpretations issued by the IASB in 2022  
has had any material impact on the financial statements of the Group.

New accounting standards and interpretations
The new standards which are effective during the year are:

•  Amendments to IAS16: Property, Plant and Equipment (effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2022);
•  Amendments to IAS37: Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets (effective for periods beginning on  

or after 1 January 2022); and

•  Amendments to IFRS3: Business Combinations (effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2022).

The Group has not applied the following new and revised IFRSs that have been issued but are not yet effective: 

•  Amendments to IAS1: Presentation of Financial Statements (effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2023); 
•  Amendments to IAS8: Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors (effective for periods beginning  

on or after 1 January 2023); and

•  Amendments to IAS12: Income Taxes (effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2023).

The above standards are not yet effective and therefore have not been applied in the financial statements. It is anticipated  
that there will be minimal impact on the financial statements from the adoption of these revised standards.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information90 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Accounting policies (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

Summary of significant accounting policies
The following accounting policies have been applied consistently for items which are considered to be material in relation  
to the financial statements.

The consolidated financial statements include the financial statements of the parent company and its subsidiaries, all of which 
are wholly-owned, to the end of the financial year. The Group does not have any associates or other joint arrangements as 
defined by IFRS 10 ‘Consolidated Financial Statements’.

(a) Basis of consolidation
Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. Control exists when the Group is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns 
from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. In assessing 
control, the Group takes into consideration potential voting rights. The acquisition date is the date on which control is 
transferred to the acquirer.

The financial statements of subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date that control 
commences until the date that control ceases. Losses applicable to the non-controlling interests in a subsidiary are allocated  
to the non-controlling interests even if doing so causes the non-controlling interests to have a deficit balance.

Business combinations
The acquisition of subsidiaries is accounted for under the acquisition method. The acquired business is measured at the effective 
date of acquisition, defined as the date control is acquired, as the aggregate fair value of assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities 
as required under IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’. Any excess of the cost of acquisition over the fair value of the separately 
identifiable net assets of the acquired business is represented as goodwill. Contingent consideration classified as a liability  
will be subsequently re-measured through the consolidated income statement.

The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of during the period are included in the consolidated income statement from 
the effective date of acquisition or up to the effective date of disposal. The consolidated gain or loss on disposal of a subsidiary  
is the difference between the net proceeds of sale and the Group’s share of the subsidiary’s net assets together with the 
carrying value of any related goodwill at the effective date of disposal.

Transactions eliminated on consolidation
Intra-Group balances and transactions, and any unrealised income and expenses arising from intra-Group transactions, are 
eliminated on consolidation.

Discontinued operations
A disposal group qualifies as discontinued operation if it is a component of an entity that either has been disposed of, or is classified 
as held for sale, and: 

•  represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations; or 
• 
• 

is part of a single co-ordinated plan to dispose of a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations; or 
is a subsidiary acquired exclusively with a view to resale. 

Discontinued operations are excluded from the results of continuing operations and are presented as a single amount as profit 
or loss after tax from discontinued operations in the income statement.

(b) Goodwill and other intangible assets
Goodwill
Goodwill arising on a business combination is recognised as an asset and represents the excess of the cost of acquisition over 
the net fair values of the separately identifiable assets and liabilities of the acquired business or subsidiary at the effective date 
of acquisition. Where the cost of an acquisition includes contingent consideration, this is based on our best assessment of the 
likely level of deferred consideration payable based on the conditions and information available at the time of approving the 
financial statements.

Goodwill is allocated to cash generating units (‘CGUs’) expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination, for the 
purpose of impairment testing. The carrying value of goodwill for each CGU is not amortised but is considered annually and 
also reviewed where management has reason to believe that a change in circumstances may give rise to any impairment or 
more frequently when there is an indication that the unit may be impaired. If the recoverable amount of the cash-generating 
unit is less than the carrying amount of the unit, the impairment loss is allocated first to reduce the carrying amount of any 
goodwill allocated to the unit and then to the other assets of the unit pro-rata on the basis of the carrying amount of each 
asset in the unit. An impairment loss recognised for goodwill is not reversed in a subsequent period.

91

Other intangible assets
Other intangible assets comprise separately identifiable intangible assets recognised on the acquisitions of businesses or 
subsidiary companies. They are recorded at fair value on acquisition less any amortisation and subsequent impairment. These 
are primarily Brand values, which are calculated on the Relief from Royalty method, and Customer relationship values, which 
are calculated on the Excess Earnings method based on the net anticipated earnings stream. Brand values are amortised on  
a straight-line basis of up to five years and Customer relationships are amortised on a straight-line basis of up to ten years.

Impairment
The carrying values of the Group’s assets are reviewed annually to determine if there is any indication of impairment. If any 
such indication exists, the assets’ recoverable values are calculated as the present value of the estimated future cash flows, 
discounted at appropriate pre-tax discount rates. Impairment losses are recognised when the carrying value of an asset or 
CGU exceeds recoverable value. Impairment losses are recognised in the consolidated income statement.

(c) Revenue recognition
The Group is engaged in the delivery of packaging materials and packing machinery to customers. Revenue is not recognised  
if there is significant uncertainty regarding the recovery of the revenue consideration. Revenue represents amounts receivable 
for goods provided to third parties in the normal course of business, net of discounts, customer rebates, VAT and other sales 
related taxes.
IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’ requires the Group to apportion revenues from customer contracts to 
separate performance obligations and recognise revenues as each performance obligation is satisfied. The Group’s revenue  
is generated from the delivery of the goods to customers and that this represents a single performance obligation. The Group 
does not enter into any repurchase agreements. It is therefore appropriate to recognise revenue at the point of transfer of 
goods to the customer, consistent with the revenue recognition framework in IFRS 15.

(d) Leasing
The Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability for all lease arrangements in which it is the 
lessee, except for short-term leases (defined as leases with a lease term of 12 months or less) and leases of low value assets 
below £4,000. For these short-term or low value leases, the Group recognises the lease payments as an operating expense 
disclosed in administrative expenses on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease.

The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of lease payments that are not paid at the commencement date, 
discounted using the rate implicit in the lease. If this rate cannot be readily determined, the Group uses appropriate incremental 
borrowing rates.

Lease liabilities are presented on two separate lines in the balance sheet for amounts due within one year and amounts due 
beyond one year. The lease liability is subsequently measured by increasing the carrying amount to reflect interest on the lease 
liability (using the effective interest method) and by reducing the liability by payments made. The Company remeasures the 
lease liability (and adjusts the related right-of-use asset) whenever the lease term has changed or a lease contract is modified 
and the modification is not accounted for as a separate lease.

Right-of-use (‘ROU’) assets comprise the initial measurement of the corresponding lease liability and are subsequently 
measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. ROU assets are depreciated over the shorter period  
of lease term and useful life of the underlying asset. If a lease transfers ownership of the underlying asset or the cost of the 
ROU asset reflects that the Company expects to exercise a purchase option, the related ROU asset is depreciated over the 
useful life of the asset. Depreciation starts on the commencement date of the lease.

As a practical expedient, IFRS 16 permits a lessee not to separate non-lease components, and instead account for any lease 
and associated non-lease components as a single arrangement. The Company has not used this practical expedient and has 
separated out the non-lease components for its leases. These non-lease components, typically servicing and maintenance 
costs, have been recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis and disclosed in administrative expenses in the 
consolidated income statement.

The Group’s incremental borrowing rates applied to lease liabilities in 2022 ranged between 2.75% and 5.75%, with the average 
rate applied across all leases being 3.22%.

ROU assets will be tested for impairment in accordance with IAS 36 Impairment of Assets.

Movements in ROU assets and lease liabilities are set out in note 12 and note 17 respectively.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information92 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Accounting policies (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

(e) Foreign currencies
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated to the respective functional currencies of Group entities at the foreign 
exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at the 
balance sheet date are retranslated to the functional currency at the exchange rate ruling at that date. Foreign exchange 
differences arising on translation are recognised in the consolidated income statement. Non-monetary assets and liabilities, 
measured at historical cost in a foreign currency, are translated using the exchange rates at the date of the transaction. 
Non-monetary assets and liabilities, stated at fair value in a foreign currency, are retranslated to the functional currency  
at the exchange rates ruling at the dates the fair value was determined.

Assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on consolidation, are translated 
to the Group’s presentational currency, Sterling, at the exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. Revenues and expenses 
of foreign operations are translated at an average rate for the year where this rate approximates to the exchange rates ruling at 
the dates of the transactions. Exchange differences arising from the translation of foreign operations are reported as an item 
of other comprehensive income and accumulated in the translation reserve.

(f) Retirement benefits
Defined contribution schemes
A defined contribution scheme is a post-employment benefit scheme under which the Company pays fixed contributions into a 
separate entity and will have no legal or constructive obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions to defined 
contribution pension schemes are recognised as an expense in the consolidated income statement in the periods during which 
services are rendered by employees.

Defined benefit schemes
A defined benefit scheme is a post-employment benefit scheme other than a defined contribution scheme. The Group’s net 
retirement benefit obligation in respect of its defined benefit pension scheme is calculated by estimating the amount of future 
benefits that employees have earned in return for their service in current and prior periods. These benefits are then discounted 
to determine the present value, and the fair values of any scheme investments, at bid price, are deducted. The net interest on 
the net retirement benefit obligation for the year is calculated by applying the discount rate used to measure the defined 
benefit obligation at the beginning of the year.

The discount rate is the yield at the reporting date on bonds that have a credit rating of at least AA that have maturity dates 
approximating to the average duration of the Group’s retirement benefit obligations and that are denominated in the currency 
in which the benefits are expected to be paid.

Remeasurements arising from defined benefit plans comprise actuarial gains and losses, returns on plan assets (excluding 
interest) and the effect of the asset ceiling (if any, excluding interest). Remeasurements are recognised in the statement  
of other comprehensive income and all other expenses related to defined benefit schemes charged in staff costs in the 
consolidated income statement.

When the benefits of a scheme are changed, or when a scheme is curtailed, the portion of the changed benefit related to past 
service by employees, or the gain or loss on curtailment, is recognised immediately in the consolidated income statement 
when the scheme amendment or curtailment occurs.

The calculation of the retirement benefit obligations is performed by a qualified actuary using the projected unit credit method. 
When the calculation results in a benefit to the Group, the recognised asset is limited to the present value of benefits available 
in the form of any future refunds from the plan or reductions in future contributions and takes into account the adverse effect 
of the present value of any minimum funding requirements.

The Group’s defined benefit pension scheme covers the Group companies at December 2022. The net defined benefit cost  
of the scheme is apportioned to these participating entities based on the employment history of scheme members, who are 
allocated to the relevant subsidiary, with any remaining members allocated to the parent company.

(g) Taxation
The tax expense represents the sum of the current tax payable and deferred tax.

Current tax is payable based on the taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from profit before tax as reported in the 
consolidated income statement because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years 
and excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The current tax liability is calculated using tax rates that have been 
enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and any adjustments in respect of prior years.

Deferred tax balances represent the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts 
of assets and liabilities in the financial statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit 
and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are not discounted.

93

The carrying value of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.

Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences.

Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is 
realised based on tax laws and rates that have been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is charged 
or credited in the consolidated income statement, except when it relates to items charged or credited in other comprehensive 
income, in which case the deferred tax is also recorded in the consolidated statement of other comprehensive income.

(h) Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost, with assets revalued before the date of transition to IFRS recorded at 
deemed cost.

No depreciation is provided on land. Depreciation is recognised so as to write off the cost of the property, plant and equipment, 
less their estimated residual values, by equal annual instalments over their estimated useful lives. The rates of depreciation 
use the straight-line method and vary between 2% and 5% per annum on buildings and 7% and 33% per annum on plant and 
equipment. Rates of depreciation are reviewed annually to ensure they remain relevant and residual values are reviewed to 
ensure they remain appropriate once in each calendar year.

(i) Inventories
Inventories are consistently stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost represents purchase price. In the case of 
work in progress and finished goods, cost comprises direct materials, direct labour costs and attributable overheads that have 
been incurred in bringing the inventories to their present location and condition. Net realisable value is based on the estimated 
selling price, less any further costs expected to be incurred to completion and disposal. Inventories are stated less provisions 
required for slow-moving and obsolete items, where appropriate.

(j) Financial instruments
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised in the Group’s balance sheet when the Group becomes a party to the 
contractual provisions of the instrument.

Financial assets categorised as investments, comprise investments in debt and equity securities and are initially recognised  
at fair value with any subsequent gains or losses recognised in the consolidated income statement.

Other financial assets comprise trade and other receivables that have fixed or determinable recoveries. The classification 
takes account of the nature and purpose of the financial assets and is determined on initial recognition. Trade and other 
receivables are measured at amortised cost less impairment having considered estimated recoverable amounts and the 
Expected Credit Loss (‘ECL’) model.

Indicators are assessed for the impairment of financial assets at each balance sheet date. Financial assets are impaired when 
there is objective evidence that as a result of one or more events that occurred after the initial recognition of the financial 
asset, the estimated future cash flows have been impacted. For trade receivables the amount of the impairment is the 
difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows.

The carrying amount of the financial asset is reduced by the impairment loss directly for all financial assets with the exception  
of trade receivables where the carrying amount is measured on an expected credit loss basis at inception rather than an 
incurred loss model. When a trade receivable is uncollectible, it is written off against the provision made on inception or at a 
previous reporting period end. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited against the provision.  
In accordance with IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’ changes in the carrying value of the provision are recognised in the 
consolidated income statement.

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand and on demand deposits, readily convertible to a known amount of cash 
and are subject to insignificant risk of changes in value.

Financial liabilities and equity instruments are classified as either financial liabilities or as equity in accordance with the 
substance of the contractual arrangements.

Financial liabilities comprise solely other financial liabilities under the terms of IFRS 7. Financial liabilities, including borrowings, 
are initially measured at fair value, net of transaction costs. Other financial liabilities are subsequently measured at amortised 
cost, with interest expense measured on an effective yield basis.

Equity instruments are any contracts evidencing a residual interest in the assets of the Company after deducting all of its 
liabilities. Equity instruments issued by the Company are recorded at the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs.

Derivative financial instruments were not used in the current or preceding financial year.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information94 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Accounting policies (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

(k) Provisions
Property provisions
The Group has a number of property leases. Under IAS 37 an entity must recognise a provision if a present obligation has 
arisen as a result of a past event, payment is probable and the amount can be estimated reliably. Where it is probable at the 
balance sheet date that there is a liability in respect of restoring the property to its original condition a provision is made for 
Director’s best estimate of the cost of fulfilling any residual repairing obligation for that property lease.

The Group may make the determination to exit a property lease before the expiry date, when it does not have a commercial 
rationale to continue to occupy the property. In this case the Group could have surplus properties and it would seek to attract 
a new tenant to obtain rental income from a sub-lease to cover its ongoing liabilities under the remaining period of the head 
lease. If there is likely to be a rental void for a period of time, then a provision is made at each balance sheet date to cover 
Director’s best estimate of the future cost of the likely void period.

(l) Share-based payments
The grant date fair value of share-based payments awards granted to employees is recognised as an employee expense, with a 
corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which the employees become unconditionally entitled to the awards. The fair 
value of the awards granted is measured using an option valuation model, taking into account the terms and conditions upon 
which the awards were granted. The amount recognised as an expense is adjusted to reflect the actual number of awards for 
which the related service and non-market vesting conditions are expected to be met, such that the amount ultimately recognised 
as an expense is based on the number of awards that do meet the related service and non-market performance conditions at 
the vesting date. For share-based payment awards with non-vesting conditions, the grant date fair value of the share-based 
payment is measured to reflect such conditions and there is no true-up for differences between expected and actual outcomes.

Details of the determination of the fair value of equity-settled share-based transactions are set out in note 25.

Notes to the financial statements
For the year ended 31 December 2022

95

1. Business and geographical segments
(a) Business segments
The segmental information reported below and on the next page does not include any amounts from discontinued operations 
which are described in more detail in note 6.

The Group’s principal business segment is Packaging Distribution, comprising the distribution of packaging materials and 
supply of storage and warehousing services in the UK, Ireland and Europe. This segment accounts for over 85% of Group 
revenue and profit. 

The Manufacturing Operations segment comprises the design, manufacture and assembly of timber, corrugated and 
foam-based packaging materials in the UK. 

External revenues from major products and services

Packaging Distribution
Manufacturing Operations

External revenues from Continuing operations

2022
£000

259,651
30,780

290,431

2021
£000

239,508
24,957

264,465

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Manufacturing
Operations
£000

2022
Total
£000

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Manufacturing
Operations
£000

2021
Total
£000

(b) Segmental information

Revenue
Total revenue
Inter-segment revenue

External revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Net operating expenses

Operating profit before amortisation
Amortisation

Operating profit

Net finance costs

Profit before tax
Tax

259,651
–

259,651
176,193

83,458
63,590

19,868
2,774

17,094

35,045
4,265

30,780
16,181

14,599
9,394

5,205
803

4,402

Profit for the year from continuing operations
Loss for the year from discontinued operations

Profit for the year

Capital additions

Depreciation/amortisation

Segment assets
Segment liabilities

Net assets

12,125

10,694

188,866
(102,937)

85,929

67

1,923

27,298
(7,207)

20,091

Inter-segment revenues are charged at prevailing market prices.

294,696
4,265

290,431
192,374

98,057
72,984

25,073
3,577

21,496

1,562

19,934
4,210

15,724
(87)

15,637

12,192

12,617

239,508
–

239,508
161,896

77,612
57,915

19,697
2,642

17,055

14,031

10,095

216,164
(110,144)

185,111
(110,212)

106,020

74,899

28,527
3,570

24,957
13,102

11,855
8,186

3,669
669

3,000

15,584

1,590

31,056
(11,061)

19,995

268,035
3,570

264,465
174,998

89,467
66,101

23,366
3,311

20,055

1,390

18,665
4,917

13,748
(1,150)

12,598

29,615

11,685

216,167
(121,273)

94,894

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information96 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

1. Business and geographical segments (continued)
(c) Geographical segments
The Group’s operations are primarily located in the UK and Europe.

Packaging Distribution activities are primarily in the UK, with some smaller activity in Europe,

Manufacturing Operations are primarily in the UK.

Continuing operations
Europe
£000

UK
£000

2022 
Total
£000

Continuing operations

UK
£000

Europe
£000

External revenue

Operating profit

Non-current assets

Capital additions

273,996

20,545

123,003

7,198

16,435

290,431

259,265

951

4,825

4,994

21,496

19,870

127,828

124,038

12,192

29,615

5,200

185

5

-

2021
Total
£000

264,465

20,055

124,043

29,615

(d) Information about major customers
No single customer accounts for more than 10% of the Group’s external revenues. Customer dependencies are regularly 
monitored.

2. Operating profit 

Operating profit from continuing operations has been arrived at after charging:

Cost of inventories recognised as an expense in the consolidated income statement
Amortisation of other intangible assets (note 10)
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Acquisition related costs
Staff costs

The detailed analysis of auditor’s remuneration is provided below: 

Audit services
Fees payable to the auditor for the audit of these financial statements
Fees payable to auditor for the audit of the Company’s subsidiaries

Total audit fees

Non-audit services
Other assurance services for the audit of the Company pension scheme

Total non-audit fees

Total fees paid to auditor

2022
£000

187,829
3,577
1,498
7,542
186
43,850

2021
£000

183,507
3,311
1,475
6,899
217
40,201

59
216

275

16

16

291

57
207

264

11

11

275

The Audit Committee reviews and approves non-audit work which the auditor performs, including the fees paid for such work, 
to ensure that the auditor’s objectivity and independence is not compromised.

3. Staff costs

The average monthly number of employees (including Directors) was:

Production
Sales and distribution
Administration

The costs incurred in respect of these employees were:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Pension costs
 Contributions to defined contribution schemes
 Contributions to defined benefit schemes
Share-based payments (note 25)

97

2022
No.

189
550
273

2021
No.

245
512
281

1,012

1,038

2022
£000

37,502
3,996

1,704
41
607

2021
£000

38,985
3,840

1,828
130
685

43,850

45,468

In accordance with section 411 of the Companies Act 2006 the above noted staff numbers and staff costs combine continuing and 
discontinued operations. The staff costs from continuing operations are £43,850,000 (2021: £40,201,000) as set out in note 2.

4. Finance costs

Interest on bank borrowings
Interest on leases
Finance (income)/cost relating to defined benefit scheme (note 24)

Finance costs from continuing operations

5. Tax

Current tax 
United Kingdom corporation tax 
Foreign tax
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Current tax charge

Deferred tax
Current year
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Change in corporation tax rate

Deferred tax charge (note 18)

Total tax charge

2022
£000

616
1,122
(176)

1,562

2021
£000

414
969
7

1,390

2022
£000

2021
£000

3,680
253
(21)

3,912

207
91
–

298

3,672
245
72

3,989

(76)
(61)
1,277

1,140

4,210

5,129

The standard rate of tax, based on the UK average rate of corporation tax is 19%. Taxation for other jurisdictions is calculated 
at the rates prevailing in these jurisdictions.

The actual tax charge varies from the standard rate of tax on the results in the consolidated income statement for the reasons 
set out below.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information 
98 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

5. Tax (continued)

Profit before tax from continuing operations
Loss before tax from discontinued operations

Profit before tax from total operations

Tax on profit at 19% (2021: 19%)

Factors affecting tax charge for the year:
Change in rate for deferred tax from 19% to 25%
Difference in rate for deferred tax (25%) on pensions
Non-deductible expenses
Difference on overseas tax rates
Changes in estimates related to prior years

Tax charge for the year

Tax charge attributable to continuing operations
Tax charge attributable to discontinued operations

Tax charge for the year

2022
£000

19,934
(87)

19,847

2021
£000

18,665
(938)

17,727

3,771

3,368

–
120
189
60
70

4,210

4,210
–

4,210

1,277
–
413
(37)
108

5,129

4,917
212

5,129

Weighted average effective tax rate for the year

21.2%

28.9%

Macfarlane Group’s corporate tax structure is such that the effective corporation tax rate should be relatively close to the 
prevailing tax rate with non-deductible expenses usually the principal reason for any variation.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities at 31 December 2022 have been calculated based on a long-term corporation tax rate of 
25%, which had been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. This changed from 19% effective from 24 May 2021.

6. Discontinued operations
On 31 December 2021, the Group entered into a sale agreement to dispose of Macfarlane Labels Limited and its subsidiaries 
Macfarlane Group Ireland (Labels & Packaging) Limited and Macfarlane Group Sweden AB (collectively ‘Macfarlane Labels’). 
Macfarlane Labels designs and prints high quality self-adhesive and resealable labels, principally for FMCG companies. The 
proceeds from the sale have been strategically invested in the continuing growth of the Group’s protective packaging businesses.

The results of the discontinued operations, which have been included as a single item of loss from discontinued operations for 
the year, were as follows:

Revenue
Expenses

Loss before tax
Attributable tax expense

Loss for the year from discontinued operations

2022
£000

–
(87)

(87)
–

(87)

2021
£000

21,220
22,158

(938)
212

(1,150)

7. Dividends

Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders in the year:
Final dividend for 2021 of 2.33p per share (2021: 1.85p per share)
Interim dividend for 2022 of 0.90p per share (2021: 0.87p per share)

99

2022
£000

3,677
1,425

5,102

2021
£000

2,920
1,373

4,293

A proposed final dividend of 2.52p per share will be paid on 1 June 2023 to shareholders on the register at 12 May 2023. This  
is subject to approval by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 9 May 2023 and therefore is not included as a liability  
in these financial statements.

8. Earnings per share

Earnings for the purposes of calculating earnings per share
Profit for the year from continuing operations

Loss for the year from discontinued operations

Profit for the year from continuing and discontinued operations

Number of shares in issue

Weighted average number of ordinary shares to calculate basic earnings per share
Dilutive effect of Long-Term Incentive Plan awards in issue

Weighted average number of ordinary shares to calculate diluted earnings per share

Basic earnings per share from continuing operations

Diluted earnings per share from continuing operations

Basic earnings per share from discontinued operations

Diluted earnings per share from discontinued operations

Basic earnings per share from continuing and discontinued operations

Diluted earnings per share from continuing and discontinued operations

2022
£000

2021
£000

15,724

(87)

15,637

13,748

(1,150)

12,598

2022
Number of
shares
‘000

158,162
1,661

159,823

9.94p

9.84p

2021
Number of
shares
‘000

157,812
1,627

159,439

8.71p

8.62p

(0.06)p

(0.73)p

(0.05)p

(0.72)p

9.89p

9.78p

7.98p

7.90p

9. Subsidiary companies
Subsidiary companies, with names, countries of incorporation and registered offices, are shown on page 132.

The Group has agreed to exempt the two companies, Carters Packaging (Cornwall) Limited (Company number 12994605)  
and Carters Packaging Limited (Company number 04691446) from the provisions of the Companies Act relating to the audit  
of individual accounts by virtue of section 479A.

On the date of approval and signing of the consolidated financial statements, as set out on page 86, the outstanding liabilities  
at the Statement of Financial Position date, 31 December 2022, of the named subsidiaries were guaranteed by the parent 
undertaking Macfarlane Group UK Limited (registered number 01630389) pursuant to s479A to s479C of the Companies Act.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information100 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

10. Goodwill and other intangible assets

Goodwill
Other intangible assets

Goodwill and other intangible assets

Goodwill

Fair value on acquisition
At 1 January 
Additions (note 23)
Impairment (note 6)
Disposals (note 6)

At 31 December

Accumulated impairment losses
At 1 January and 31 December

Carrying amount
At 31 December 2022

At 31 December 2021

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Manufacturing
Operations
£000

49,081
13,078

62,159

7,493
6,033

13,526

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Manufacturing
Operations
£000

46,107
2,974
–
–

49,081

7,493
–
–
–

7,493

2022
Total
£000

56,574
19,111

75,685

2022
Total
£000

53,600
2,974
–
–

56,574

2021
Total
£000

53,600
21,302

74,902

2021
Total
£000

45,467
9,492
(987)
(372)

53,600

–

–

–

–

49,081

7,493

56,574

46,107

7,493

53,600

On 17 May 2022 Macfarlane Group PLC acquired 100% of PackMann Gessellschaft für Verpackungen und Dienstleistungen 
mbH (‘PackMann’). Goodwill arising on the PackMann acquisition was added to the Packaging Distribution CGU.

At 31 December 2022, the Group had two CGU Groupings to which goodwill had been ascribed namely:

(i)  Packaging Distribution, comprising goodwill arising on all acquisitions in this segment since 2001; and 
(ii)  Manufacturing Operations, comprising goodwill arising on the acquisition of GWP. 

The recoverable amount of each CGU Grouping is determined using ‘value in use’ calculations with key assumptions relating to 
discount rates, sales growth rates, projected gross margin and overhead costs. A post-tax discount rate of 9.6% (2021: 12.2%) 
is used for both CGU’s reflecting the Group’s weighted average cost of capital adjusted for appropriate market risk, which is 
considered to be the most definitive basis for arriving at a discount rate. The Group believes the risk profiles across the markets 
in which it operates are not significantly different and has therefore deemed it appropriate to apply the same discount rate to 
both CGUs. The pre-tax discount rate is 12.8% (2021: 15.1%) for each CGU Grouping and the Group’s effective tax rate is then 
applied to give the post-tax discount rate.

Sales growth rates of 1%, changes in gross margin and overhead costs are based on our expectation of future performance in the 
markets in which we operate. These are consistent with our budgets for 2023 and strategic plans for future years. The assumptions 
are used to extrapolate cash flows for five years after which a terminal value is calculated assuming no inherent growth.

The Directors believe the assumptions used are appropriate. In addition they have conducted a sensitivity analysis to 
determine the changes in assumptions that would result in an impairment of the carrying amount of goodwill. Based on this 
analysis the Directors believe that any reasonable changes in the key assumptions would maintain a value for each CGU 
Grouping that exceeds its carrying amount. Therefore at 31 December 2022 no impairment charge is required against  
the carrying amount of goodwill.

 
101

2022
Total
£000

37,426
1,386

38,812

16,124
3,577

19,701

2021
Total
£000

27,944
9,482

37,426

12,813
3,311

16,124

Brand
values
£000

Customer
relationships
£000

36,356
1,145

37,501

15,180
3,447

18,627

1,070
241

1,311

944
130

1,074

237

126

18,874

19,111

21,176

21,302

Other intangible assets

Fair value on acquisition
At 1 January 
Additions (note 23)

At 31 December

Amortisation
At 1 January 
Charge for year

At 31 December

Carrying amount
At 31 December 2022

At 31 December 2021

Other intangible assets comprise separately identifiable intangible assets recognised on the acquisitions of businesses and 
subsidiary companies between 2014 and 2022. They are recorded at fair value on acquisition less subsequent amortisation.

These are primarily Brand values, which are calculated on the Relief from Royalty method and a valuation of Customer 
relationships, which is calculated on the Excess Earnings method, based on the net anticipated earnings stream. Brand  
values are calculated on royalty rates of 0.5%, consistent with an assessment of what would be charged in a typical franchise 
agreement. The valuation of Customer relationships is calculated using our best estimates of customer attrition rates, and 
returns, based on assessments of performance levels in the markets in which we operate. Brand values and Customer 
relationship valuations are amortised on a straight-line basis over periods up to five years and up to ten years respectively.

At 31 December 2022, the Group retained values in respect of:

Year of 
acquisition

Company/business acquired

Brand

Customer
relationships

2014
2014
2015
2016
2016
2016
2017
2018
2018
2019
2019
2020
2021
2021
2022

Packaging business of Lane Packaging Limited
Network Packaging Limited
One Packaging Limited
Packaging business of Colton Packaging Teesside
Packaging business of Edward McNeil Limited
Nelsons for Cartons & Packaging Limited
Packaging business of Greenwoods Stock Boxes Limited and Nottingham Recycling Limited
Tyler Packaging (Leicester) Limited
Harrisons Packaging Limited
Ecopac (U.K.) Limited
Leyland Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited
Packaging business of Armagrip
GWP Group Limited
Carters Packaging Limited
PackMann Gesellschaft für Verpackungen und Dienstleistungen mbH

ü

ü
ü
ü

ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information102 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

11. Property, plant and equipment

Note

Property
£000

Plant,
 machinery
& vehicles
£000

Cost
At 1 January 2021
Acquisitions
Additions
Transfer from right of use assets
Exchange movements
Disposals

At 31 December 2021
Acquisitions
Additions
Transfer from right of use assets
Exchange movements
Disposals

At 31 December 2022

Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2021
Acquisitions
Charge for year
Transfer from right of use assets
Exchange movements
Disposals

At 31 December 2021
Acquisitions
Charge for year
Transfer from right of use assets
Exchange movements
Disposals

At 31 December 2022

Carrying amount
At 31 December 2022

At 31 December 2021

At 1 January 2021

23

23

8,114
589
499
–
–
(1,797)

7,405
–
904
–
–
(199)

8,110

4,542
476
445
–
–
(1,000)

4,463
–
336
–
–
(174)

4,625

3,485

2,942

3,572

Total
£000

34,913
3,659
2,132
602
(229)
(12,402)

28,675
564
3,285
139
19
(2,312)

30,370

26,273
2,795
1,989
56
(152)
(8,387)

22,574
428
1,498
52
15
(2,060)

26,799
3,070
1,633
602
(229)
(10,605)

21,270
564
2,381
139
19
(2,113)

22,260

21,731
2,319
1,544
56
(152)
(7,387)

18,111
428
1,162
52
15
(1,886)

17,882

22,507

4,378

3,159

5,068

7,863

6,101

8,640

The main components of property, plant and equipment are:

(i) 

(ii) 

 Two properties owned in our Manufacturing Operations and tenant’s improvements at a number of short and medium-term 
leases in Packaging Distribution, categorised as Property.
 A significant investment in plant and machinery in Manufacturing Operations, typically corrugated case-making machinery, 
as well as investments in our IT hardware systems throughout the Group, which are all categorised under the combined 
heading of Plant, machinery and vehicles.

Property at net book value comprises:
Freeholds
Long leaseholds
Short leaseholds

2022
£000

957
2,438
90

3,485

2021
£000

1,001
1,820
121

2,942

Contractual commitments for capital expenditure for which no provision has been made in these accounts amount to £744,000 
(2021: £1,778,000).

103

Note

Property
£000

Plant,
 machinery
& vehicles
£000

32,054
2,978
7,738
(174)
1,167
–
(2,507)

41,256
1,634
1,083
227
–
(3,139)

7,453
876
1,365
(2)
(16)
(602)
(684)

8,390
–
3,464
(16)
(139)
(1,240)

23

Total
£000

39,507
3,854
9,103
(176)
1,151
(602)
(3,191)

49,646
1,634
4,547
211
(139)
(4,379)

41,061

10,459

51,520

8,314
–
5,564
(50)
(1,480)
–
(1,233)

11,115
5,707
(637)
–
(3,068)

13,117

2,609
160
1,718
(1)
(44)
(56)
(573)

3,813
1,835
(98)
(52)
(1,033)

4,465

10,923
160
7,282
(51)
(1,524)
(56)
(1,806)

14,928
7,542
(735)
(52)
(4,101)

17,582

27,944

5,994

33,938

30,141

4,577

34,718

12. Right of use assets 

Cost
At 1 January 2021
Acquisitions
Additions
Exchange movements
Lease modifications
Transfer to property, plant and equipment
Disposals

At 31 December 2021
Acquisitions
Additions
Lease modifications
Transfer to property, plant and equipment
Disposals

At 31 December 2022

Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2021
Acquisitions
Charge for year
Exchange movements
Lease modifications
Transfer to property, plant and equipment
Disposals

At 31 December 2021
Charge for year
Lease modifications
Transfer to property, plant and equipment
Disposals

At 31 December 2022

Carrying amount
At 31 December 2022

Carrying amount
At 31 December 2021

The property portfolio comprises a number of property leases for periods from one to fifteen years, which are subject to rent 
reviews. The Group also leases the majority of its commercial vehicles, motor vehicles and forklift trucks on leases, with the 
leases running for periods of up to seven years.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information 
104 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

13. Inventories

Raw materials and consumables
Work in progress
Finished goods and goods for resale

2022
£000

1,034
139
21,435

22,608

2021
£000

988
148
20,133

21,269

Inventories represent raw materials, work in progress and finished goods held at the year-end in our businesses to respond  
to customers’ requirements. These comprise large numbers of comparatively small balances.

Local teams review inventory levels, older and obsolete inventories and provide against exposures throughout the year.  
The Group’s executive management then reviews these local judgements to ensure they properly reflect movements  
in absolute inventory levels, ageing of holdings and known obsolescence.

Movement in the provisions for slow-moving and obsolete inventories

At 1 January
Acquisitions
Disposals
Additional provisions recognised in the consolidated income statement
Inventories written off during the year

At 31 December

14. Trade and other receivables

Current
Trade receivables 
Loss allowance

Other receivables
Prepayments

Non-current
Other receivables

2022
£000

1,318
193
–
633
(384)

1,760

2021
£000

1,289
20
(184)
571
(378)

1,318

2022
£000

2021
£000

54,840
(795)

54,045
3,766
1,536

59,347

53,267
(731)

52,536
4,423
1,582

58,541

38

35

Trade receivables represent amounts owed by customers in respect of revenues for goods or services provided prior to the 
year end. The Group’s credit risk is primarily attributable to trade receivables. The average credit period taken at the reporting 
date is 55 days (2021: 54 days). No interest is charged on overdue receivables.

The Group uses external credit scoring systems to assess new customers’ credit quality and set credit limits for each customer. 
The Group has a substantial customer base covering a wide range of business segments. No individual customer represents 
more than 5% of total trade receivables. Receivables balances greater than £25,000 are reviewed by the Board twice in each year.

Since the inception of IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’, the Group has applied a simplified approach to measuring the ECL  
level. This uses a provision matrix which takes into account historical credit loss experience based on the past-due status of 
receivables, adjusted to reflect current conditions and management’s estimates of future economic conditions and known 
recoverability issues as a means of measuring the loss allowance.

The Group writes off trade receivables when there is no realistic prospect of recovery with the amount written off against the 
loss allowance held. The credit risk profile of these receivables is presented based on their past due status and the calculated 
loss ratios applied to the profiled receivables to give the ECL.

105

Risk profile category (ageing)

Current
Overdue
0-30 days
30-60 days
60-90 days
Over 90 days

2022
£000

ECL rate

2022 ECL
 allowance
£000

39,855

0.92%

12,694
1,351
486
454

54,840

1.71%
2.74%
9.05%
28.6%

367

217
37
44
130

795

2021
£000

ECL rate

39,352

0.84%

11,308
1,772
493
342

53,267

1.56%
2.43%
8.32%
41.50%

2021 ECL
allowance
£000

329

176
43
41
142

731

The ECL allowance reflects the Group’s prior experience and assessment of the current economic environment. In determining 
the recoverability of trade receivables and the level of loss allowance, known changes in credit quality or expected credit loss 
from the date credit was originally granted are taken into account.

ECL allowance
At 1 January
Acquisitions
Disposals
Change in loss allowance
Amounts written off as uncollectible (net of recoveries)

At 31 December

2022
£000

731
14
–
368
(318)

795

2021
£000

1,148
5
(108)
(32)
(282)

731

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximate to their fair value.

15. Financial instruments
The Group funds its operations from a number of sources of finance, namely operating cash flows, bank borrowings, finance 
leases and shareholders’ equity, which comprises share capital, reserves and retained earnings. The objective is to achieve a 
capital structure with an appropriate cost of capital, whilst providing flexibility in immediate and medium-term funding to 
accommodate any material investment requirements.

The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise borrowings, cash and short-term deposits, and other items, such as 
trade receivables and trade payables that arise directly from its operations. The main purpose of these financial instruments  
is to provide finance for the Group’s operations. Throughout the period under review, the Group’s policy is that no trading in 
financial instruments is undertaken for speculative purposes.

There has been no significant change to the Group’s exposure to market risks during 2022. Principal risks arising are liquidity 
risk and credit risk, with secondary risks being interest rate risk and currency risk. The Board reviews and agrees policies for 
managing each of these risks, which are summarised below and have remained unchanged since the beginning of 2023.

Liquidity risk
The Group’s liquidity requirements are met by ensuring adequate access to funds by maintaining appropriate levels of 
committed bank facilities, which are reviewed regularly. The Group bank borrowing facility with Lloyds Banking Group PLC of 
£30m was extended in the year and is available until December 2025. The facility bears interest at normal commercial rates 
and carries standard financial covenants in relation to interest cover and levels of headroom over certain trade receivables’ 
balances. The maturity profile is set out in this note.

Credit risk
The Group’s exposure to credit risk is managed by dealing only with banks and financial institutions with good credit ratings and 
by applying considerable rigour in managing trade receivables. The Group’s principal credit risk is primarily attributable to its 
trade receivables. Amounts presented in the balance sheet are shown net of an ECL allowance, as estimated by the Group’s 
management with details set out in note 14.

Interest rate risk
The Group borrows in currencies at floating rates of interest. It was not considered necessary to cover interest rate exposures 
by the use of financial instruments during 2022.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information106 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

15. Financial instruments (continued)
A sensitivity analysis has been prepared based on bank interest rate exposures at the year-end date and the stipulated change 
taking place at the beginning of the financial year and held constant throughout the year. If interest rates had been 50 basis points 
higher and all other variables held constant, the Group’s profit before tax would have decreased by £61,000 (2021: £66,000).

Currency risk
The Group had three overseas subsidiaries in 2022, one operating in Ireland, one operating in Holland and one operating in 
Germany. Revenues and expenses are denominated exclusively in Euros. Movements in the Euro to sterling exchange rates 
could affect the Group’s sterling balance sheet. The Group’s policy during 2022 has been to review the need to hedge currency 
exposures on a regular basis and it was not considered necessary to cover existing currency exposures by the use of financial 
instruments. The Group continues to review the need to hedge exposures on a regular basis.

The Sterling value of foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities at the year-end is as follows:

Euros

Assets
2022
£000

8,071

Assets
2021
£000

2,326

Liabilities
2022
£000

Liabilities
2021
£000

3,520

814

The Sterling value of the Group’s foreign currency denominated profit before tax from continuing operations is as follows:

Euros

2022
£000

1,015

2021
£000

185

The following table details the sensitivity to a 5% reduction in Sterling against the respective foreign currencies. The sensitivity 
of the Group’s exposure to foreign currency risk is determined based on the exposure at the year-end and on the change taking 
place at the beginning of the financial year and held constant throughout the year.

Euros

Cash and cash equivalents
Currency – Sterling

– Euros
– US Dollars

Cash and cash equivalents

Bank borrowings
Currency – Sterling

– Euros

Bank borrowings

Net bank debt/(funds)

Result
2022
£000

38

Result
2021
£000

Other equity
2022
£000

Other equity
2021
£000

9

70

2022
£000

5,232
413
61

5,706

8,245
898

9,143

76

2021
£000

11,777
519
19

12,315

9,840
–

9,840

3,437

(2,475)

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash at bank and other short-term highly liquid investments with an original maturity of three 
months or less. £360,000 included with cash and cash equivalents has a right of offset against the Sterling bank borrowings.

The Group bank borrowing facility with Lloyds Banking Group PLC (‘Lloyds’) of £30m is available until December 2025. Under 
the facility, trade receivables of the Group’s largest trading subsidiary, Macfarlane Group UK Limited are assigned to Lloyds 
who then fund the Group in advance of the collection of these transferred receivables. The Invoice Discounting facility bears 
interest at normal commercial rates and carries standard financial covenants in relation to interest cover and levels of 
headroom over trade receivables’ balances.

 
 
 
 
  
 
107

The Group has been in compliance with all conditions in relation to its borrowing facility throughout 2022 and has remained  
in compliance in 2023 to date.

The Group’s German subsidiary, PackMann, has bank borrowing facilities with Commerzbank of £0.9m repayable on demand.

Interest rates
Bank borrowings are held at floating rates of interest. The average effective interest rate on these borrowings approximates  
to 4.52% per annum (2021: 2.70%).

Fair value of financial instruments
Current assets and liabilities are all held at floating rates. The fair values of cash and cash equivalents and bank borrowings  
at 31 December 2022 all materially equate to book values.

Borrowing facilities
The Group’s committed borrowing facilities, for which all conditions precedent had been met, are as follows:

Drawn down
Undrawn

Committed borrowing facilities

The Group’s borrowing profile is as follows:

At amortised cost
Bank borrowings – secured
Lease liabilities

Current borrowings
Non-current – lease liabilities

Total borrowings

Equity

Gearing (net debt to equity) ratio

2022
£000

9,143
21,743

30,886

2021
£000

9,840
20,160

30,000

2022
£000

2021
£000

9,143
6,641

15,784
27,928

43,712

9,840
6,364

16,204
28,578

44,782

106,020

94,894

41%

47%

Financial instruments carried at fair value
IFRS 7 requires that all financial instruments carried at fair value be analysed under certain levels. The table below analyses 
financial instruments, into a fair value hierarchy based on the valuation technique used to determine fair value.

•  Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.
•  Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly 

(i.e., as prices) or indirectly (i.e., derived from prices).

•  Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

The fair values of all financial assets and financial liabilities by class together with their carrying amounts shown in the balance 
sheet are as follows: 

Financial instruments which are designated  
 at fair value through profit or loss (note 16)

Carrying
amount
2022
£000

Fair value
2022
£000

Level 1
2022
£000

Level 2
2022
£000

Level 3
2022
£000

Contingent consideration

(3,695)

(3,695)

–

–

(3,695)

Contingent consideration

Carrying
amount
2021
£000

Fair value
2021
£000

(6,625)

(6,625)

Level 1
2021
£000

–

Level 2
2021
£000

Level 3
2021
£000

–

(6,625)

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information 
108 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

15. Financial instruments (continued)
The following table shows the valuation techniques used for Level 3 fair values, and significant unobservable inputs used  
for Level 3 items. 

Financial instruments measured at fair value

Valuation technique

Significant unobservable inputs (Level 3 only)

Contingent consideration

The expected payment reflects calculated  
cash outflows under possible earn-out  
scenarios and is not discounted 

Trading performance of acquired 
subsidiary companies in a period  
of 24 months following acquisition

The following are the contractual maturities of financial liabilities, including estimated interest payments and excluding  
the effect of netting agreements.

Non-derivative financial instruments

Secured bank borrowings
Lease liabilities
Trade payables
Accruals and deferred income
Contingent consideration

Non-derivative financial instruments

Secured bank borrowings
Lease liabilities
Trade payables
Accruals and deferred income
Contingent consideration

16. Trade and other payables

Due within one year
Trade payables
Other taxation and social security
Contingent consideration
Other payables
Accruals and deferred income

Due after more than one year
Contingent consideration

2022 Contractual cash flows

Due within
one year 
£000

Due from
 1-5 years
£000

Due after
five years
£000

9,143
6,641
36,291
10,167
3,695

65,937

–
17,720
–
–
–

17,720

–
10,208
–
–
–

10,208

2021 Contractual cash flows

Due within
one year
£000

Due from
1-5 years
£000

Due after
five years
£000

9,840
6,364
42,147
11,703
2,930

72,984

–
16,331
–
–
3,695

20,026

–
12,247
–
–
–

12,247

Total
£000

9,143
34,569
36,291
10,167
3,695

93,865

Total
£000

9,840
34,942
42,147
11,703
6,625

105,257

2022
£000

2021
£000

36,291
3,849
3,695
575
10,167

54,577

–
–

42,147
3,905
2,930
290
11,703

60,975

3,695
3,695

Trade and other payables principally comprise amounts outstanding for trade purchases and ongoing costs in all the Group’s 
businesses. No interest is charged on overdue trade payables. £2,930,000 of deferred consideration was paid during 2022 
related to the acquisitions of GWP Holdings Limited and Carters Packaging (Cornwall) Limited in 2021. The Directors consider 
that the carrying amounts for trade and other payables approximate to their fair value.

17. Lease liabilities

Amounts payable under leases
Within one year
Between one and five years
After more than five years

Present value of lease liabilities
Due for settlement within 12 months (current liabilities)

Due for settlement after more than 12 months (non-current liabilities)

At 1 January
New leases
Acquisitions (note 23)
Disposals
Lease modifications
Exchange movements
Interest
Repayments under leases

At 31 December

109

2022
£000

2021
£000

6,641
17,720
10,208

34,569
(6,641)

27,928

2022
£000

34,942
4,546
1,634
(237)
899
–
1,122
(8,337)

34,569

6,364
16,331
12,247

34,942
(6,364)

28,578

2021
£000

28,692
9,103
3,500
(1,363)
2,675
(126)
1,034
(8,573)

34,942

The Directors consider that the carrying amounts for lease liabilities approximate to their fair value. Repayment of lease obligations 
in the cash flow statement of £7,215,000 consists of repayments under leases of £8,337,000 less interest of £1,122,000.

18. Deferred tax 

Tax losses/
 accelerated
 capital
 allowances
£000

Other
 intangible
 assets
£000

Retirement
 benefit
 obligations
£000

At 1 January 2021
Acquisition (note 23)
Disposal
Transferred to corporation tax
Credited in income statement
Credited in other comprehensive income
 Deferred tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
 Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax 

At 31 December 2021
Acquisition (note 23)
(Charged)/credited in income statement
Credited in other comprehensive income
 Deferred tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability

(79)
(73)
372
(168)
(371)

–
–

(319)
–
(484)

–

(2,876)
(1,802)
–
–
(387)

–
–

(5,065)
(387)
689

279
–
–
–
(382)

(2,054)
88

(2,069)
–
(503)

–

21

21

At 31 December 2022

2022 deferred tax assets
 Due outwith one year
2022 deferred tax liabilities
 Due outwith one year

2021 deferred tax assets
 Due outwith one year
2021 deferred tax liabilities
 Due outwith one year

(803)

(4,763)

(2,551)

(8,117)

105

(908)

(803)

19

(338)

(319)

–

–

105

(4,763)

(4,763)

(2,551)

(2,551)

(8,222)

(8,117)

–

–

19

(5,065)

(5,065)

(2,069)

(2,069)

(7,472)

(7,453)

Total
£000

(2,676)
(1,875)
372
(168)
(1,140)

(2,054)
88

(7,453)
(387)
(298)

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information110 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

18. Deferred tax (continued)
Deferred tax balances represent tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts of 
assets and liabilities in the financial statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit and  
is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities at 31 December 2022 have been 
calculated based on a corporation tax rate of 25% where it is not anticipated to reverse by 1 April 2023 when the 25% rate 
comes into effect.

19. Share capital

Allotted, issued and fully paid:
At 1 January
Issued during the year

At 31 December

Number of 
25p shares

2022
£000

2021
£000

157,812,000
525,000

158,337,000

39,453
131

39,584

39,453
–

39,453

The Company has one class of ordinary shares, which carry no right to fixed income.

Each ordinary share carries one vote in any General Meeting of the Company.

On 16 May 2022, the Company issued 525,000 ordinary shares of 25p at a value of 106.00p to settle 2019 share awards under 
the Company’s 2016 Performance Share Plan. 

20. Reserves 

Share
premium
£000

Revaluation
reserve
£000

Own
shares
£000

Translation
reserve
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

Balance at 1 January 2021
Profit for the year
Dividends paid (see note 7)
Foreign currency translation differences – foreign operations
Share-based payments
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability taken direct to equity
Deferred tax taken direct to equity

Balance at 31 December 2021
Profit for the year
Dividends paid (see note 7)
Issue of new shares
Foreign currency translation differences – foreign operations
Share-based payments
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability taken direct to equity
Deferred tax taken direct to equity

Balance at 31 December 2022

13,148
–
–
–
–
–
–

13,148
–
–
425
–
–
–
–

13,573

70
–
–
–
–
–
–

70
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

70

–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
(7)
–
–
–
–

(7)

291
–
–
(120)
–
–
–

171
–
–
–
45
–
–
–

216

26,816
12,598
(4,293)
–
685
8,212
(1,966)

42,052
15,637
(5,102)
(549)
–
607
(82)
21

52,584

Exchange differences arising in the consolidated accounts on the retranslation at closing rates of the Group’s net investments 
in foreign subsidiary companies are recorded as movements on the translation reserve.

111

Note

Property
£000

1,567
1,775
597
(187)
–
(174)

3,578
817
(124)
(942)

3,329

1,769
1,560

3,329

1,730
1,848

3,578

Other
£000

859
–
–
(127)
(732)
–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–

–

Total
£000

2,426
1,775
597
(314)
(732)
(174)

3,578
817
(124)
(942)

3,329

1,769
1,560

3,329

1,730
1,848

3,578

Cash
and cash
 equivalents
£000

Bank
borrowing
£000

Lease
liabilities
£000

Total
debt
£000

7,228

–
–
–
–
–
5,087

(7,766)

(28,692)

(29,230)

–
–
–
–
–
(2,074)

(9,103)
(3,500)
1,363
(2,675)
126
7,539

(9,103)
(3,500)
1,363
(2,675)
126
10,552

12,315

(9,840)

(34,942)

(32,467)

–
–
–
–
(6,609)

5,706

–
–
–
–
697

(4,546)
(1,634)
237
(899)
7,215

(4,546)
(1,634)
237
(899)
1,303

(9,143)

(34,569)

(38,006)

Cash
and cash
 equivalents
£000

Bank
borrowing
£000

Net bank
(debt)/funds
£000

5,706

12,315

(9,143)

(9,840)

(3,437)

2,475

21. Provisions

At 1 January 2021
Additions in the year
Acquisitions
Releases
Disposals
Payments

At 31 December 2021
Additions in the year
Releases
Payments

At 31 December 2022

2022 – Due within one year
2022 – Due after more than one year

At 31 December 2022

2021 – Due within one year
2021 – Due after more than one year

At 31 December 2021

Property provisions relate to sums due in respect of dilapidations.

22. Analysis of changes in net debt 

At 1 January 2021
Non-cash movements
 New leases
 Acquisitions
 Disposals
 Lease modifications
 Exchange movements
Cash movements

At 31 December 2021
Non-cash movements
 New leases
 Acquisitions
 Disposals
 Lease modifications
Cash movements

At 31 December 2022

Net bank debt 2022

Net bank funds 2021

Cash and cash equivalents (presented as a single class of asset on the face of the balance sheet) comprise cash at bank  
and other short-term highly liquid investments with maturity of three months or less. 

The movement in net bank debt is inclusive of the net cash outflow in respect of acquisitions set out in note 23.  

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information112 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

23. Acquisitions
On 17 May 2022, Macfarlane Group PLC acquired 100% of PackMann Gessellschaft für Verpackungen und Dienstleistungen 
mbH (‘PackMann’), for a maximum consideration, excluding cash/bank balances and bank borrowings acquired, of £7.4m. 
£5.9m was paid in cash on acquisition, in addition to cash/bank balances and bank borrowings retained by Macfarlane Group 
PLC, and the deferred consideration of £1.5m is payable in the second quarters of 2023 and 2024, subject to certain trading 
targets being met in the two twelve-month periods ending on 31 May 2023 and 2024 respectively. The trading targets set for 
the two twelve month periods are an enhancement over the profit levels being achieved in the period prior to acquisition and 
they are considered unlikely to be achieved. Therefore the Directors do not consider it probable that deferred consideration  
will be payable. A recovery for closing balance sheet adjustments of £0.6m was received on 30 August 2022.

£2.2m was paid in 2022 to the sellers of GWP Holdings Limited, acquired in 2021, as the profit target was met for the twelve 
month period ending 28 February 2022 and deferred consideration of £2.9m is payable in the first quarter of 2023, subject  
to profit targets being met in the twelve-month period ending 28 February 2023. 

£0.7m was paid in 2022 to the sellers of Carters (Cornwall) Limited, acquired in 2021, as the profit target was met for the twelve 
month period ending 31 March 2022 and deferred consideration of £0.8m is payable in the second quarter of 2023, subject to 
profit targets being met in the twelve-month period ending 31 March 2023.

Contingent considerations are recognised as a liability in trade and other payables and are remeasured to fair value of £3.7m  
at the balance sheet date based on a range of outcomes between £Nil and £5.2m. Trading in the post-acquisition period 
supports the remeasured value of £3.7m.

The impact of the acquisition of PackMann on 2022 results was revenue for the year of £7.8m and profit of £0.2m. If the 
PackMann acquisition had been completed on the first day of 2022, revenues for the year would have been £13.4m and profit 
would have been £0.3m.

Fair values assigned to net assets acquired and consideration paid and payable are set out below:

Net assets acquired
Other intangible assets (note 10)
Tangible assets (inc. ROU assets)
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and bank balances
Bank borrowings
Trade and other payables 
Current tax liabilities
Lease liabilities 
Deferred tax liabilities (note 18)

Net assets acquired
Goodwill arising on acquisition (note 10)

Total consideration
Contingent consideration on acquisitions
Prior years

Total cash consideration

Net cash outflow arising on acquisitions
Cash consideration
Cash and bank balances acquired

Net cash outflow – acquisitions

2022
Total
£000

1,386
1,770
2,364
1,347
290
(730)
(1,899)
(196)
(1,634)
(387)

2,311
2,974

5,285

2,930

8,215

(8,215)
(440)

(8,655)

113

24. Retirement benefit obligations
Introduction
Macfarlane Group PLC sponsors a defined benefit pension scheme for former UK employees – the Macfarlane Group PLC 
Pension & Life Assurance Scheme (1974) (‘the Scheme’). One of the trading subsidiaries, Macfarlane Group UK Limited is also a 
sponsoring employer of the Scheme. Macfarlane Labels Limited was a sponsoring employer until 31 December 2021 when the 
company was sold and ceased to be a sponsoring member. The Group paid £0.7m into the pension scheme in 2022 to satisfy 
the debt agreed with the trustees in relation to the cessation of Macfarlane Labels Limited as a sponsoring employer. The 
Scheme is currently in surplus and disclosure of the respective proportions of the Group surplus are included and disclosed  
in the financial statements of each of the two participating employers.

The Scheme is an HMRC registered pension scheme, administered by a Board of Trustees composed of employer-nominated 
representatives and member-nominated Trustees which is legally separate from the Group. The Scheme’s investments are 
held separately from those of the Group in managed funds under the supervision of the Trustees. The Trustees are required 
by law to act in the interest of all classes of beneficiary in the Scheme and are responsible for investment policy and the 
administration of benefits. Macfarlane Group PLC, based on legal opinion provided, has an unconditional right to a refund  
of surplus assets assuming the full settlement of plan liabilities in the event of a wind up of the Scheme. Furthermore, in the 
ordinary course of business the trustees have no rights to unilaterally wind up the Scheme, or otherwise augment the benefits 
due to members of the Scheme. Based on these rights, any net surplus in the Scheme is recognised in full.

The Scheme provides qualifying employees with an annual pension of 1/60 of pensionable salary for each completed years’ 
service on attainment of a normal retirement age of 65. Pensionable salaries were frozen for the remaining active members  
at the levels current at 30 April 2009 with the change taking effect from 30 April 2010. As a result no further salary inflation 
applies for active members who elected to remain in the Scheme. Active members’ benefits also include life assurance cover, 
with the payment of these benefits at the discretion of the Trustees of the Scheme. The Scheme was closed to new entrants 
during 2002. The Scheme was closed to future accrual on 30 November 2022 with the 3 remaining active members transferring 
to the Group’s defined contribution pension scheme.

On leaving active service a deferred member’s pension is revalued from the time of withdrawal until the pension is drawn. 
Revaluation in deferment is statutory and since 2010 has been revalued on the Consumer Price Index (‘CPI’) measure of 
inflation. Revaluation of pensions in payment is a blend of fixed increases and inflationary increases depending on the relevant 
periods of accrual of benefit. For pensions in payment, the inflationary increase is currently based on the Retail Price Index 
(‘RPI’) measure of inflation or based on Limited Price Indexation (‘LPI’) for certain defined periods of service.

During 2012, Macfarlane Group PLC agreed with the Board of Trustees to amend benefits for pensioner, deferred and active 
members in the Scheme by offering a Pension Increase Exchange (‘PIE’) option to pensioner members and a PIE option to all 
other members at retirement after 1 May 2012.

Balance sheet disclosures at 31 December 2022
The Scheme’s qualified actuary from Aon carries out triennial valuations using the Projected Unit Credit Method to determine 
the level of deficit/surplus. For the most recent triennial valuation at 1 May 2020, the results of this valuation showed that the 
market value of the relevant investments of the Scheme was £94,100,000 and represented 91% of the actuarial value of 
benefits that had accrued to members.

The investment classes held by the Scheme and the Scheme deficit, based on the results of the actuarial valuation as at 1 May 
2020, updated to the year-end are as shown below:

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information114 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

24. Retirement benefit obligations (continued)

Investment class

Equities
UK equity funds
Overseas equity funds
Multi-asset diversified growth funds

Bonds
Liability-driven investment funds

Other
European loan fund
Secured property income fund
Cash
Fair value of scheme investments

Present value of scheme liabilities

Pension scheme surplus/(deficit)

Valuation
2022
£000

Asset
allocation

Valuation
2021
£000

Asset
 allocation

Valuation
2020
£000

Asset
allocation

6,616
13,671
12,674

9.4%
19.4%
18.0%

9,392
17,010
29,113

9.4%
16.9%
29.0%

8,351
14,585
31,559

8.4%
14.7%
31.7%

23,352

33.3%

30,531

30.4%

31,463

31.7%

6,546
5,670
1,957

9.3%
8.0%
2.6%

6,778
6,995
604

6.7%
7.0%
0.6%

6,493
6,254
725

6.5%
6.3%
0.7%

70,486

100.0%

100,423

100.0%

99,430

100.0%

(60,287)

10,199

(92,156)

8,267

(100,901)

(1,471)

The Trustees review the scheme’s investments on a regular basis and consult with the Company regarding any proposed 
changes to the investment profile. During 2022 the Trustees maintained the overall allocations in line with the strategic asset 
allocation in the Trustees’ Statement of Investment Principles.

Liability-Driven Investment Funds provide a match of 100% against the impact of inflation movements on pension liabilities 
and against the impact of movements in interest rates on pension liabilities.

The ability to realise the Scheme’s investments at, or close to, fair value was considered when setting the investment strategy. 
83% (2021: 86%) of the Scheme’s investments can be realised at fair value on a daily or weekly basis. The remaining investments 
have monthly or quarterly liquidity, however, whilst the income from these helps to meet the Scheme’s cash flow needs, they 
are not expected to be realised at short notice. The present value of the Scheme liabilities is derived from cash flow projections 
over a long period and is thus inherently uncertain.

Assumptions
The Scheme’s liabilities at 31 December 2022 were calculated on the following bases as required under IAS 19:

Discount rate
Rate of increase in salaries
Rate of increase in pensions in payment

Spouse’s pension assumption
Pensioner/active and deferred members
PIE take up rate
Inflation assumption (RPI)
Inflation assumption (CPI)
Life expectancy beyond normal retirement age of 65
Scheme members aged 55
 Male
 Female
Scheme members aged 65
 Male
 Female
Average uplift for GMP service

2022

2021

2020

4.80%
0.00%
3% or 5%
for fixed increases 
or 3.17% for LPI.
2.09% post 
5 April 2006

1.90%
0.00%
3% or 5% 
for fixed increases 
or 3.30% for LPI. 
2.27% post  
5 April 2006

1.35%
0.00%
3% or 5% 
for fixed increases  
or 2.95% for LPI. 
2.15% post  
5 April 2006

75%/75%
65%
3.40%
2.80%

22.6 years
24.2 years

22.0 years
23.4 years
0.40%

75%/75%
65%
3.40%
2.90%

22.8 years
24.4 years

22.3 years
23.6 years
0.40%

75%/75%
65%
3.00%
2.50%

22.8 years
24.3 years

22.2 years
23.5 years
0.40%

115

Sensitivity to significant assumptions
The Pension scheme exposes the Group to actuarial risks, such as interest rate risk, inflation risk, longevity risk and investment 
risk. The significant assumptions used for IAS 19 are discount rate, inflation and mortality. If different assumptions were used, 
then this could have a material effect on the deficit. Assuming all other assumptions are held static then a movement in the 
following key assumptions would affect the level of the Pension scheme surplus/deficit as shown below:

Assumptions
Discount rate movement of +3.0%
Inflation rate movement of +0.25%
Mortality movement of +0.1 year in age rating

2022
£000

2021
£000

14,101
(375)
88

28,740
(765)
180

Positive figures reflect a reduction in scheme liabilities and therefore a reduction in the deficit or increase in the surplus. The 
sensitivity information has been prepared using the same method as adopted when updating the results of the most recent 
actuarial valuation to the balance sheet date and is consistent with the approach adopted in previous years.

The level of sensitivities shown reflect average movements in the assumptions in the last three years.

The sensitivity information assumes that the average duration of the scheme’s liabilities is twelve years.

GMP equalisation
In 2018, the Directors made the judgement that the estimated effect of GMP equalisation on the Group’s pension liabilities 
was a past service cost. The average uplift for GMP service for impacted members was reflected through the consolidated 
income statement in 2018, with any subsequent changes in the estimate to be recognised in other comprehensive income.

Right to surplus
UK pension legislation requires that pension schemes are funded prudently. Following the conclusion of the 2021 actuarial 
valuation, the scheme’s trustees agreed with the Company to a deficit recovery period of 4 years. As part of this agreement, 
the Group reconfirmed its effective unconditional right to a refund of any surplus, based on and in accordance with the terms 
and conditions of the defined benefit scheme and minimum funding requirements. Accordingly IFRIC 14 does not require an 
adjustment to the net pension surplus.

Macfarlane Group PLC is committed to paying contributions of £1,250,000 per annum, which along with investment returns 
from return-seeking assets is expected to make good the actuarial shortfall, based on the results of the most recent triennial 
valuation at 1 May 2020, by April 2024.

The employer contribution rate for active members from 1 May 2020 is 37.4% of pensionable salary and the employee 
contribution rate is 7.0% of pensionable salary. Following the closure of the Scheme to future accrual on 30 November 2022  
there are no active members at 31 December 2022.

Movement in the scheme surplus/(deficit) during the year

At 1 January
Current service costs
Contributions from sponsoring employers
Past service cost (curtailed due to closure of scheme/disposal of business)
Net finance income/(cost) (note 4)
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability in the year

At 31 December

Analysis of amounts charged to profit before tax
Current service cost
Past service cost (curtailed due to closure of scheme/disposal of business)
Net finance income/(cost)

Pension expense charged to profit before tax

2022
£000

8,267
(42)
1,991
(111)
176
(82)

10,199

(42)
(111)
176

23

2021
£000

(1,471)
(126)
1,992
(333)
(7)
8,212

8,267

(126)
(333)
(7)

(466)

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information116 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

24. Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
Analysis of the remeasurement of the pension scheme liability recognised  
 in the statement of other comprehensive income

Return on scheme investments excluding amount shown in interest income
Changes due to scheme experience
Changes in assumptions underlying the present value of scheme liabilities

Remeasurement of the pension scheme liability recognised in the statement  
 of other comprehensive income

Movement in the fair value of scheme investments
At 1 January
Interest income
Return on scheme investments (excluding amount shown in interest income)
Contributions from sponsoring employers
Contributions from scheme members
Benefits paid

At 31 December

Movement in the present value of scheme liabilities
At 1 January
Current service cost
Past service cost (curtailed due to closure of scheme/disposal of business)
Interest cost
Contributions from scheme members
Changes due to scheme experience
Changes in assumptions underlying the scheme liabilities
Benefits paid

At 31 December

2022
£000

(29,475)
(1,935)
31,328

2021
£000

1,273
850
6,089

(82)

8,212

100,423
1,886
(29,475)
1,991
9
(4,348)

99,430
1,332
1,273
1,992
23
(3,627)

70,486

100,423

(92,156)
(42)
(111)
(1,710)
(9)
(1,935)
31,328
4,348

(60,287)

(100,901)
(126)
(333)
(1,339)
(23)
850
6,089
3,627

(92,156)

The history of experience adjustments and actual returns on scheme assets and scheme liabilities is as follows:

Present value of defined benefit obligations
Fair value of scheme investments

Pension scheme surplus/(deficit)

Actual return on scheme investments
Amount

Percentage of scheme investments

Experience adjustment on scheme liabilities
Amount

Percentage of scheme liabilities

Experience adjustment on scheme investments
Amount

Percentage of scheme investments

2022
£000

2021
£000

2020
£000

(60,287)
70,486

10,199

(92,156)
100,423

(100,901)
99,430

8,267

(1,471)

2019
£000

(94,526)
88,061

(6,465)

(27,589)

(39.1%)

29,393

48.8%

(29,475)

(41.8%)

2,605

2.6%

6,939

7.5%

1,273

1.3%

12,406

12.5%

13,263

15.1%

(8,543)

(8.5%)

(10,617)

(11.2%)

10,655

10.7%

11,154

12.7%

2018
£000

(85,592)
75,827

(9,765)

(2,156)

(2.8%)

4,111

4.8%

(4,143)

(5.5%)

Defined contribution schemes
The Group also operates a number of defined contribution pension arrangements, set up as the Macfarlane Group Personal 
Pension Plan, including an Auto-enrolment scheme. The assets of these plans are held separately from those of the Group in 
independently administered funds. The pension cost charge represents contributions paid by the Group to these plans and 
amounted to £1,704,000 (2021: £1,828,000). Contributions amounting to £202,000 (2021: £219,000) were payable to the 
plans and are included in trade and other payables at 31 December.

25. Share-based payments
Equity-settled long-term incentive plans 
Movements in PSP awards during the year

Outstanding at 1 January
Awarded during the year
Vested during the year
Lapsed during the year

Outstanding at 31 December

117

Number of
 shares
2022

Number of
 shares
2021

1,627,156
662,582
(518,196)
–

1,267,311
579,547
–
(219,702)

1,771,542

1,627,156

A nil cost option award was granted under The Macfarlane Group PLC Long Term Incentive Plan in March 2022 based on 100% 
of salary. The performance condition requires EPS in 2024 to be between 10.16p and 12.19p for between 25%-100% of this 
part of the award to vest, working on a straight-line basis.

A nil cost option award was granted under The Macfarlane Group PLC Long Term Incentive Plan in March 2021 based on 100% 
of salary. The performance condition requires EPS in 2023 to be between 7.95p and 9.54p for between 25%-100% of this part 
of the award to vest, working on a straight-line basis.

A nil cost option award was granted under The Macfarlane Group PLC Long Term Incentive Plan in September 2020 based  
on 100% of salary. The performance condition requires EPS in 2022 to be between 6.53p and 7.84p for between 25%-100%  
of this part of the award to vest, working on a straight-line basis.

All awards are subject to an underpin based on the Remuneration Committee’s view of overall performance in the three-year 
periods to 31 December 2022, 2023 and 2024 respectively. No re-setting of either award is allowed. Vesting periods are three 
years and awards vesting then have a holding period of two years after vesting.

A nil cost option award was granted under The Macfarlane Group PLC Long Term Incentive Plan in May 2019 based on 100%  
of salary. The performance conditions required EPS in 2021 to be between 6.77p and 8.12p for between 25%-100% of this part 
of the award to vest, working on a straight-line basis. The 2019 vesting at 100% and dividend equivalent awarded in shares were 
confirmed by the Remuneration Committee at its meeting on 21 February 2022. The total number of shares vesting were 518,196.

The Group recognised an expense of £607,000 (2021: £685,000) in 2022 relating to equity-settled long-term incentive plan 
awards on the basis that the 2019 awards vested at 100% (2021: 100%), the 2020 awards had an estimated probability of 
vesting of 100% (2021: 100%), the 2021 awards had an estimated probability of vesting of 100% (2021: 100%) and the 2022 
awards had an estimated probability of vesting of 50%.

26. Post balance sheet event
There are no post balance sheet events to be disclosed.

27. Related party transactions
The Group has related party relationships with 

its subsidiaries, listed on page 132, 
its Directors who comprise the Group Board; and 

(i) 
(ii) 
(iii)  the Macfarlane Group PLC sponsored pension schemes (see note 24).

Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries are eliminated on consolidation and are not disclosed.

Key management personnel comprise the Group Board. Their remuneration is set out below in aggregate for each of the 
categories specified in IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’.

Directors’ remuneration
Employer’s national insurance contributions

2022
£000

1,768
243

2,011

2021
£000

1,189
150

1,339

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information118 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

27. Related party transactions (continued)
Further details of Directors’ individual and collective remuneration are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 
58. The details provided in the Directors’ Remuneration Report address the Companies Act disclosure requirements relating 
to Directors’ remuneration.

Details of Directors’ shareholdings in the Company are shown on page 60 and total dividends of £41,000 were paid in respect 
of these shareholdings in 2022 (2021: £33,000).

Disclosures in relation to the pension schemes are set out in note 24.
The Directors have considered the implications of IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’ and are satisfied that there are no other 
related party transactions occurring during the year, which require disclosure other than those already disclosed in these 
financial statements.

Company balance sheet
At 31 December 2022

119

Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use assets
Investments
Retirement benefit obligations
Trade and other receivables

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Trade and other receivables
Current tax asset
Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Lease liabilities
Bank borrowings

Total current liabilities

Net current assets

Non-current liabilities
Deferred tax liabilities
Lease liabilities
Provisions

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Own shares
Profit and loss account

Total equity

Note

2022 
£000

2021
£000

29
30
31
41
33

33

34
36

32
36
35

37
38
38
38

39

40
89
28,370
3,570
32,222

64,291

3,743
–
316

4,059

48
104
23,085
2,894
30,997

57,128

3,825
59
5,895

9,779

68,350

66,907

1,214
15
–

1,229

2,830

894
84
825

1,803

3,032

1,106
14
63

1,183

8,596

726
99
825

1,650

2,833

65,318

64,074

39,584
13,573
(7)
12,168

65,318

39,453
13,148
–
11,473

64,074

The Company has taken advantage of Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 and consequently a separate profit and loss 
account for the parent company is not presented as part of these financial statements.

The Company’s profit for the year is £5,735,000. The accompanying notes are an integral part of this Company balance sheet.

The financial statements of Macfarlane Group PLC, Company registration number SC004221, were approved by the Board  
of Directors on 23 February 2023 and signed on its behalf by

Peter D. Atkinson 
Chief Executive 

Ivor Gray
Finance Director

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information 
 
 
 
 
120 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Company statement of changes in equity
For the year ended 31 December 2022

Share
capital
£000

Share
premium
£000

Own
shares
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

Note

Total
£000

At 1 January 2021

39,453

13,148

Comprehensive income
Loss for the year
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with shareholders
Dividends
Share-based payments

Total transactions with shareholders

At 31 December 2021

Comprehensive income
Profit for the year
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with shareholders
Dividends
New shares issued
Share-based payments

Total transactions with shareholders

41
32

7
25

41
32

7

25

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

39,453

13,148

–
–
–

–

–
131
–

131

–
–
–

–

–
425
–

425

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–

–
–
–

–

–
(7)
–

(7)

13,406

66,007

(633)
3,031
(758)
35

1,675

(633)
3,031
(758)
35

1,675

(4,293)
685

(3,608)

(4,293)
685

(3,608)

11,473

64,074

5,735
5
(1)

5,739

(5,102)
(549)
607

(5,044)

5,735
5
(1)

5,739

(5,102)
–
607

(4,495)

At 31 December 2022

39,584

13,573

(7)

12,168

65,318

The accompanying notes are an integral part of this statement of changes in equity.

Notes to the Company financial statements
For the year ended 31 December 2022

121

28. Significant accounting policies
Macfarlane Group PLC is a public company listed on the London Stock Exchange, incorporated and domiciled in the United 
Kingdom and registered in Scotland.
These financial statements were prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework 
(‘FRS 101’).

In preparing these financial statements, the Company applies the recognition, measurement and disclosure requirements  
of International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the United Kingdom (‘Adopted IFRSs’) but makes amendments 
where necessary in order to comply with the Companies Act 2006 and has set out below where advantage of the FRS 101 
disclosure exemptions has been taken. In these financial statements, the Company has applied the exemptions available 
under FRS 101 in respect of the following disclosures: 

(i)  Cash flow statement and related notes;
(ii)  Comparative period reconciliations for share capital and tangible assets;
(iii)  Disclosures in respect of transactions with wholly owned subsidiaries; 
(iv)  The effects of new but not yet effective IFRSs;
(v)  Disclosures in respect of the compensation of Key Management Personnel; and 
(vi)  Disclosures in respect of capital management.

As the consolidated financial statements for Macfarlane Group PLC include the equivalent disclosures, the Company has also 
applied the exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect of certain disclosures required by;

IFRS 2 Share Based Payments in relation to Group-settled share-based payments;
IFRS 3 Business Combinations relating to business combinations undertaken by the Company; and

(i) 
(ii) 
(iii)  IFRS 7 Financial Instruments.

Going concern
The Directors, in their consideration of going concern, have reviewed the Company and Group’s future cash flow forecasts  
and revenue projections, which they believe are based on a prudent assessment of the market and past experience as set out  
on page 23. 

After making enquiries, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources to continue  
in operational existence for at least the next twelve months. For this reason they continue to adopt the going concern basis  
in preparing the financial statements.

Critical judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
The preparation of financial statements requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts 
reported for assets and liabilities as at the balance sheet date and the amounts reported for revenues and expenses during  
the year. Due to the nature of estimation, the actual outcomes may well differ from these estimates. 

Critical judgements
No significant critical judgements have been made in the current or prior year.

Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The key sources of estimation uncertainty that have a significant effect on the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities are 
discussed below:

Retirement benefit obligations 
The determination of any defined benefit pension scheme liability is based on assumptions determined with independent 
actuarial advice. The key assumptions used include discount rate, inflation rate and mortality assumptions, for which a 
sensitivity analysis for the Group deficit is provided in note 24. The Directors consider that these sensitivities represent 
reasonable sensitivities which could occur in the next financial year.

Changes in accounting policies and application of revised standards and interpretations
There are no new accounting policies applied in 2022 which have had a material effect on these accounts.

The Directors do not consider that the adoption of new and revised standards and interpretations issued by the IASB in 2022 
has had any material impact on the financial statements of the Group.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information122 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

28. Significant accounting policies (continued)
Accounting policies
The financial statements are prepared on the historical cost basis except that certain of the following assets and liabilities  
are stated at their fair value. The following accounting policies have been applied consistently in dealing with items which  
are considered material in relation to the preparation of these financial statements.

Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment losses. 
Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis to write off the cost or valuation of the assets to their estimated residual 
values over the period of their expected useful lives. The rates of depreciation vary between 2%-5% per annum on property 
and 7%-25% per annum on plant and equipment. Rates of depreciation are reviewed annually to ensure they remain relevant 
and residual values are reviewed once in each calendar year.

Investments
Investments held as fixed assets are stated in note 31 at cost less any provision for impairment.

Non-derivative financial instruments
Non-derivative financial instruments comprise investments in equity and debt securities, trade and other debtors, cash and 
cash equivalents, loans and borrowings, and trade and other creditors.

Trade and other receivables
Trade and other receivables are recognised initially at fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition they are measured at amortised 
cost using the effective interest method, less any impairment losses.

Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are recognised initially at fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition they are measured at amortised 
cost using the effective interest method.

Interest-bearing borrowings
Interest-bearing borrowings are recognised initially at fair value less attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial 
recognition, interest-bearing borrowings are stated at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’
The Company recognises a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability for all lease arrangements in which it is the 
lessee, except for short-term leases (defined as leases with a lease term of 12 months or less) and leases of low value assets 
below £4,000. For these short-term or low value leases, the Company recognises the lease payments as an operating expense 
on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease.

For all other leases, the lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the lease payments that are not paid at the 
commencement date, discounted by using the rate implicit in the lease. If this rate cannot be readily determined, the Company 
uses its incremental borrowing rate.

Lease liabilities are presented on two separate lines in the balance sheet for amounts due within one year and amounts due 
beyond one year. The lease liability is subsequently measured by increasing the carrying amount to reflect interest on the lease 
liability (using the effective interest method) and by reducing the liability by payments made. The Company remeasures the 
lease liability (and adjusts the related right-of-use asset) whenever the lease term has changed or a lease contract is modified 
and the lease modification is not accounted for as a separate lease. The Company did not make any such adjustments during 
the period presented.

Right-of-use assets comprise the initial measurement of the corresponding lease liability and are subsequently measured  
at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. Right-of-use assets are depreciated over the shorter period  
of lease term and useful life of the underlying asset. If a lease transfers ownership of the underlying asset or the cost of the 
right-of-use asset reflects that the Company expects to exercise a purchase option, the related right-of-use asset is 
depreciated over the useful life of the underlying asset. Depreciation starts at the commencement date of the lease. 

As a practical expedient, IFRS 16 permits a lessee not to separate non-lease components, and instead account for any lease 
and associated non-lease components as a single arrangement. The Company has not used this practical expedient and has 
separated out the non-lease components for its leases. These non-lease components, typically servicing and maintenance 
costs, have been recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis and disclosed in the profit and loss account.

The Company’s incremental borrowing rate applied to lease liabilities in 2022 is 4.0%.

Movements in lease liabilities during 2022 are set out in note 36.

123

Revenue recognition
Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable and represents amounts receivable for 
management services provided to Group undertakings, net of VAT. Revenue is recognised over time as the related charges  
are made. 

Financial instruments
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised in the Company’s balance sheet when the Company becomes a party  
to the contractual provisions of the instrument.

Financial assets
Financial assets, categorised as investments, are recognised and derecognised on the effective date where the purchase or 
sale of an investment is under a contract whose terms require the delivery of the investment within the timeframe established. 
They are initially measured at fair value, net of transaction costs except for those financial assets classified at fair value through 
the income statement, which are initially measured at fair value.

Other financial assets comprise trade and other debtors that have fixed or determinable recoveries and are classified as trade 
and other debtors. The classification takes account of the nature and purpose of the financial assets and is determined on 
initial recognition. These are measured at amortised cost less impairment.

Indicators are assessed for the impairment of financial assets at each balance sheet date. Financial assets are impaired when 
there is objective evidence that as a result of one or more events that occurred after the initial recognition of the financial 
asset, the estimated future cash flows have been impacted. For trade and other debtors the amount of the impairment is  
the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows.

The carrying amount of the financial asset is reduced by the impairment loss.

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand and on demand deposits, readily convertible to a known amount of cash 
and are subject to insignificant risk of changes in value.

Financial liabilities and equity instruments are classified as either financial liabilities or as equity in accordance with the 
substance of the contractual arrangements.

Financial liabilities comprise solely other financial liabilities under the terms of IFRS 7. Financial liabilities, including borrowings, 
are initially measured at fair value, net of transaction costs. Other financial liabilities are subsequently measured at amortised 
cost, with interest expense measured on an effective yield basis.

Equity instruments are any contracts evidencing a residual interest in the assets of the Company after deducting all of  
its liabilities. Equity instruments issued by the Company are recorded at the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs.

Derivative financial instruments were not used in the current or preceding financial year.

Contingent consideration classified as a liability will be subsequently re-measured through the income statement under  
the requirements of the revised IFRS 3.

Taxation
The tax expense represents the sum of the current tax payable and deferred tax.

Current tax is payable based on the taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from profit before tax as reported in the 
profit and loss account because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years and it 
further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The current tax liability is calculated using tax rates that have been 
enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax balances represent the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts 
of assets and liabilities in the financial statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit 
and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are not discounted.

The carrying value of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.

Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences.

Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is 
realised based on tax laws and rates that have been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is charged 
or credited in the profit and loss account, except when it relates to items charged or credited in other comprehensive income, 
in which case the deferred tax is also recorded in the statement of other comprehensive income.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information124 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

28. Significant accounting policies (continued)
Retirement benefit costs
Defined contribution schemes
A defined contribution plan is a post-employment benefit plan under which the Company pays fixed contributions into a 
separate entity and will have no legal or constructive obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions to 
defined contribution pension plans are recognised as an expense in the profit and loss account in the periods during which 
services are rendered by employees.

Defined benefit schemes
A defined benefit plan is a post-employment benefit plan other than a defined contribution plan. The Group’s net retirement 
benefit obligation in respect of its defined benefit pension plan is calculated by estimating the amount of future benefits that 
employees have earned in return for their service in current and prior periods. These benefits are then discounted to determine 
the present value, and the fair values of any plan investments, at bid price, are deducted. The Group determines the net interest 
on the net retirement benefit obligation for the year by applying the discount rate used to measure the defined benefit obligation 
at the beginning of the year.

The discount rate is the yield at the reporting date on bonds that have a credit rating of at least AA that have maturity dates 
approximating to the average duration of the Group’s retirement benefit obligations and that are denominated in the currency 
in which the benefits are expected to be paid.

Remeasurements arising from defined benefit plans comprise actuarial gains and losses, returns on plan assets (excluding 
interest) and the effect of the asset ceiling (if any, excluding interest). Remeasurements are recognised in the statement of 
other comprehensive income and all other expenses related to defined benefit plans charged in staff costs in the profit and 
loss account.

When the benefits of a plan are changed, or when a plan is curtailed, the portion of the changed benefit related to past service 
by employees, or the gain or loss on curtailment, is recognised immediately in the profit and loss account when the plan 
amendment or curtailment occurs.

The calculation of the retirement benefit obligations is performed by a qualified actuary using the projected unit credit method. 
When the calculation results in a benefit to the Group, the recognised asset is limited to the present value of benefits available 
in the form of any future refunds from the plan or reductions in future contributions and takes into account the adverse effect 
of the present value of any minimum funding requirements.

The net defined benefit cost of the plan is apportioned to participating entities on the basis of the employment history of 
scheme members, who are allocated to the relevant subsidiary company, with any remaining unallocated members allocated  
to the parent company.

Property provisions
The Company has obligations for two property leases. Under IAS 37 an entity must recognise a provision if a present obligation 
has arisen as a result of a past event, payment is probable and the amount can be estimated reliably. Where it is probable at the 
balance sheet date, that there is a liability in respect of restoring the property to its original condition a provision is made for 
management’s best estimate of the cost of fulfilling any residual repairing obligation for that property lease.

The Company may make the determination to exit a property lease before the expiry date, when it does not have a commercial 
rationale to continue to occupy the property. In this case the Company could have surplus properties and it would seek to 
attract a new tenant to obtain rental income from a sub-lease to cover its ongoing liabilities under the remaining period of the 
head lease. If there is likely to be a rental void for a period of time, then a provision is made at each balance sheet date to cover 
management’s best estimate of the future cost of the likely void period.

Share-based payments
The fair value of share-based payments awards granted to employees is recognised as an employee expense, with a 
corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which the employees become unconditionally entitled to the awards. The  
fair value of the awards granted is measured using an option valuation model, taking into account the terms and conditions upon 
which the awards were granted. The amount recognised as an expense is adjusted to reflect the actual number of awards for 
which the related service and non-market vesting conditions are expected to be met, such that the amount ultimately recognised 
as an expense is based on the number of awards that do meet the related service and non-market performance conditions at the 
vesting date. For share-based payment awards with non-vesting conditions, the grant date fair value of the share-based payment 
is measured to reflect such conditions and there is no true-up for differences between expected and actual outcomes. Details 
of the determination of the fair value of equity-settled share-based transactions are set out in note 25.

29. Property, plant and equipment

Cost
At 1 January 2022 and 31 December 2022

Depreciation
At 1 January 2022
Charge for the year

At 31 December 2022

Net book value
At 31 December 2022

At 31 December 2021

30. Right of use assets

Property

Cost
At 1 January 2022 and 31 December 2022

Depreciation
At 1 January 2022
Charge for year

At 31 December 2022

Net book value
At 31 December 2022

At 31 December 2021

31. Investments

Investment in subsidiaries at cost
At 1 January
Acquisitions
Disposals

At 31 December 

125

Plant and
 equipment
£000

Total
£000

173

173

125
8

133

40

48

125
8

133

40

48

£000

148

44
15

59

89

104

2022
£000

2021
£000

23,085
5,285
–

28,370

26,935
–
(3,850)

23,085

The parent company sold its investment in Macfarlane Labels Limited on 31 December 2021 (note 6).

On 17 May 2022, the parent company acquired 100% of PackMann Gessellschaft für Verpackungen und Dienstleistungen 
mbH (‘PackMann’), for a maximum consideration, excluding cash/bank balances and bank borrowings acquired, of £7.4m. 
£5.9m was paid in cash on acquisition, in addition to cash/bank balances and bank borrowings retained by Macfarlane Group 
PLC, and the deferred consideration of £1.5m is payable in the second quarters of 2023 and 2024, subject to certain trading 
targets being met in the two twelve-month periods ending on 31 May 2023 and 2024 respectively. The trading targets set for 
the two twelve month periods are an enhancement over the profit levels being achieved in the period prior to acquisition and 
they are considered unlikely to be achieved. Therefore the Directors do not consider it probable that deferred consideration  
will be payable. A recovery for closing balance sheet adjustments of £0.6m was received on 30 August 2022.

Details of the principal operating subsidiaries are set out on page 132. 

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information126 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

32. Deferred tax (liability)/asset

Deferred tax on pension scheme (surplus)/deficit
At 1 January
Charged to reserves
Charged to profit and loss account

At 31 December 

33. Trade and other receivables

Due within one year
Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings
Other receivables
Prepayments and accrued income
Other taxation and social security
Deferred tax asset (see below)

Deferred tax asset – Corporation tax losses/timing differences
At 1 January
Charged to profit and loss account

At 31 December

2022
£000

(726)
(1)
(167)

(894)

2022
£000

3,000
592
147
–
4

3,743

19
(15)

4

2022
£000

2021
£000

111
(723)
(114)

(726)

2021
£000

3,000
651
134
21
19

3,825

19
–

19

2021
£000

Due after more than one year
Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings

32,222

30,997

Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings attract interest at normal commercial rates.

34. Trade and other payables 

Trade creditors
Other taxation and social security
Accruals and deferred income

2022
£000

502
15
697

2021
£000

526
–
580

1,214

1,106

The Company is a party to the Group bank borrowing facility with Lloyds Banking Group PLC, a committed facility of £30m now 
available until December 2025. The facility bears interest at normal commercial rates and carries standard financial covenants 
in relation to interest cover and levels of headroom over the trade receivables of Macfarlane Group UK Limited, the principal 
trading subsidiary.

The Company and certain subsidiaries have given inter-company guarantees to secure the drawdown on this facility. The 
drawdown at 31 December 2022 by the subsidiary company, Macfarlane Group UK Limited amounted to £8.2m (2021: £9.8m).

35. Provisions 

At 1 January 2022

At 31 December 2022

The provision is due after more than one year. Property provisions relate to sums due in respect of dilapidations. 

127

Property
£000

825

825

36. Lease liabilities

Amounts due under leases
Within one year
Between one and five years
After more than five years

Total amount due
Due within one year

Due after more than one year

At 1 January
Repayments under leases

At 31 December

37. Share capital 

Called up, allotted and fully paid:
At 1 January
Issued during the year

At 31 December

2022
£000

2021
£000

15
66
18

99
(15)

84

113
(14)

99

14
63
36

113
(14)

99

128
(15)

113

Number of 
25p shares

2022
£000

2021
£000

157,812,000
525,000

158,337,000

39,453
131

39,584

39,453
–

39,453

The Company has one class of ordinary shares, which carry no right to fixed income.

Each ordinary share carries one vote in any General Meeting of the Company. 

On 16 May 2022, the Company issued 525,000 ordinary shares of 25p at a value of 106.00p to settle share awards under the 
Company’s 2016 Performance Share Plan. 

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information128 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

38. Reserves

Balance at 1 January 2021
Loss for the year
Dividends paid (note 7)
Post-tax actuarial gain in pension scheme taken direct to reserves
Share-based payments (note 25)

Balance at 1 January 2022
Profit for the year
Dividends paid (note 7)
Issue of new shares
Post-tax actuarial gain in pension scheme taken direct to reserves
Share-based payments (note 25)

Balance at 31 December 2022

Share
premium
£000

13,148
–
–
–
–

13,148
–
–
425
–
–

13,573

Own
shares
£000

Profit and
loss account
£000

13,406
(633)
(4,293)
2,308
685

11,473
5,735
(5,102)
(549)
4
607

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
(7)
–
–

(7)

Total
£000

26,554
(633)
(4,293)
2,308
685

24,621
5,735
(5,102)
(131)
4
607

39. Reconciliation of movements in shareholders’ funds 

Profit/(loss) for the year
Dividends to equity holders in the year
Post-tax actuarial gain in pension scheme taken direct to equity
Share-based payments

Movements in shareholders’ funds in the year
Opening shareholders’ funds

Closing shareholders’ funds

40. Operating profit

Operating profit for the parent company has been arrived at after charging:
Depreciation
Depreciation on right-of-use assets
Auditor’s remuneration  

Audit services
Non-audit services

Staff costs
The average monthly number of employees was:
Administration

The costs incurred in respect of these employees were:
Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Other pension costs
Share-based payments (note 25)

12,168

25,734

2022
£000

5,735
(5,102)
4
607

1,244
64,074

65,318

2021
£000

(633)
(4,293)
2,308
685

(1,933)
66,007

64,074

2022
£000

8
15
59
16

2022
No.

10

2022
£000

1,559
292
32
607

2,490

2021
£000

6
15
57
11

2021
No.

10

2021
£000

1,451
188
42
685

2,366

 
129

41. Retirement benefit obligations
Introduction
Macfarlane Group PLC sponsors a defined benefit pension scheme for certain active and former UK employees – the Macfarlane 
Group PLC Pension & Life Assurance Scheme (1974) (‘the Scheme’). One of the trading subsidiaries, Macfarlane Group UK 
Limited is also sponsoring employers of the Scheme. Macfarlane Labels Limited was a sponsoring employer until 31 December 
2021 when the company was sold and ceased to be a sponsoring member. The Group paid £0.7m into the pension scheme in 
2022 to satisfy the debt agreed with the trustees in relation to the cessation of Macfarlane Labels Limited as a sponsoring 
employer. The Scheme is currently in surplus and disclosure of the respective proportions of the Group surplus are included 
and disclosed in the financial statements of each of the three participating employers.

The Scheme is an HMRC registered pension scheme and is administered by a Board of Trustees composed of employer-
nominated representatives and member-nominated Trustees which is legally separate from the Group. The Scheme’s 
investments are held separately from those of the Group in managed funds under the supervision of the Trustees. The 
Trustees are required by law to act in the interest of all classes of beneficiary in the Scheme and are responsible for investment 
policy and the administration of benefits. Macfarlane Group PLC, based on legal opinion provided, has an unconditional right  
to a refund of surplus assets assuming the full settlement of plan liabilities in the event of a wind up of the Scheme. Furthermore, 
in the ordinary course of business the trustees have no rights to unilaterally wind up the Scheme, or otherwise augment the 
benefits due to members of the Scheme. Based on these rights, any net surplus in the Scheme is recognised in full.

The Scheme provides qualifying employees with an annual pension of 1/60 of pensionable salary for each completed years’ 
service on attainment of a normal retirement age of 65. Pensionable salaries were frozen for the remaining active members  
at the levels current at 30 April 2009 with the change taking effect from 30 April 2010. As a result no further salary inflation 
applies for active members who elected to remain in the Scheme. Active members’ benefits also include life assurance cover, 
with the payment of these benefits at the discretion of the Trustees. The Scheme was closed to new entrants during 2002. 
The Scheme was closed to future accrual on 30 November 2022 with the 3 remaining active members transferring to the 
Group’s defined contribution pension scheme.

On leaving active service a deferred member’s pension is revalued from the time of withdrawal until the pension is drawn. 
Revaluation in deferment is statutory and since 2010 has been revalued on the Consumer Price Index (‘CPI’) measure of 
inflation. Revaluation of pensions in payment is a blend of fixed increases and inflationary increases depending on the relevant 
periods of accrual of benefit. For pensions in payment, the inflationary increase is currently based on the Retail Price Index 
(‘RPI’) measure of inflation or based on Limited Price Indexation (‘LPI’) for certain defined periods of service.

During 2012, Macfarlane Group PLC agreed with the Board of Trustees to amend benefits for pensioner, deferred and active 
members in the Scheme by offering a Pension Increase Exchange (‘PIE’) option to pensioner members and a PIE option to all 
other members at retirement after 1 May 2012.

Balance sheet disclosures at 31 December 2022
The Scheme’s qualified actuary from Aon carries out triennial valuations using the Projected Unit Credit Method to determine 
the level of deficit. For the most recent triennial valuation at 1 May 2020, the results of this valuation showed that the market 
value of the relevant investments of the Scheme was £94,100,000 and represented 91% of the actuarial value of benefits that 
had accrued to members.

The investments held by the Scheme and the Scheme deficit, based on the results of the actuarial valuation as at 1 May 2020, 
updated to the year-end to reflect amounts attributable to Macfarlane Group PLC, the parent company, are as shown below:

Investment class

Equities
Multi-asset diversified funds
Liability-driven investment funds
European loan fund
Secured property income fund
Cash

Fair value of scheme investments
Present value of scheme liabilities

Pension scheme surplus/(deficit)

2022
£000

7,100
4,436
8,173
2,291
1,984
686

24,670
(21,100)

3,570

2021
£000

9,241
10,189
10,686
2,372
2,449
211

35,148
(32,254)

2,894

2020
£000

9,175
12,624
12,585
2,598
2,501
288

39,771
(40,360)

(589)

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information130 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2022

41. Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
The Trustees review the Scheme’s investments on a regular basis and consult with the Company regarding any proposed 
changes to the investment profile. During 2022 the Trustees maintained the strategic asset allocation in the Trustees’ 
Statement of Investment Principles.

Liability-Driven Investment Funds provide a match of 100% against the impact of inflation movements on pension liabilities 
and against the impact of movements in interest rates on pension liabilities.

The ability to realise the Scheme’s investments at, or close to, fair value was considered when setting the investment strategy. 
83% (2021: 86%) of the Scheme’s investments can be realised at fair value on a daily or weekly basis. The remaining investments 
have monthly or quarterly liquidity, however, whilst the income from these helps to meet the Scheme’s cash flow needs, they 
are not expected to be realised at short notice. The present value of the Scheme liabilities is derived from cash flow projections 
over a long period and is thus inherently uncertain.

The Scheme’s liabilities at 31 December 2022 were calculated on the following bases as required under IAS19:

Assumptions

Discount rate
Rate of increase in salaries
Rate of increase in pensions in payment

2022

2021

2020

4.80%
0.00%
3% or 5% 
for fixed increases 
or 3.17% for LPI.
2.09% post  
5 April 2006

1.90%
0.00%
3% or 5% 
for fixed increases  
or 3.30% for LPI. 
2.27% post  
5 April 2006

1.35%
0.00%
3% or 5%  
for fixed increases  
or 2.95% for LPI. 
2.15% post  
5 April 2006

Spouse’s pension
Pensioner/active and deferred members
PIE take up rate
Inflation assumption (RPI)
Inflation assumption (CPI)
Life expectancy beyond normal retirement age of 65
Members aged 55
 Male
 Female
Members aged 65
 Male
 Female
Average uplift for GMP service

Movement in scheme surplus/(deficit) during the year

At 1 January
Current service cost
Past service cost (curtailed due to closure of scheme)
Company contributions
Net finance income/(cost)
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability in the year

At 31 December

Analysis of amounts charged to operating profit
Current service cost
Past service cost (curtailed due to closure of scheme)

Pension cost charged to operating profit

Analysis of amounts charged to other financial charges
Expected return on pension scheme investments
Interest cost of pension scheme liabilities

Other financial charges

75%/75%
65%
3.40%
2.80%

22.6 years
24.2 years

22.0 years
23.4 years
0.40%

75%/75%
65%
3.40%
2.90%

22.8 years
24.4 years

22.3 years
23.6 years
0.40%

75%/75%
65%
3.00%
2.50%

22.8 years
24.3 years

22.2 years
23.5 years
0.40%

2021
£000

(589)
(31)
–
485
(2)
3,031

2,894

(31)
–

(31)

467
(469)

(2)

2022
£000

2,894
(15)
(73)
697
62
5

3,570

(15)
(73)

(88)

660
(598)

62

 
131

2022
£000

2021
£000

(10,316)
10,321

5

35,148
660
(10,316)
697
3
(1,522)

24,670

(32,254)
(15)
(73)
(598)
(3)
10,321
1,522

(21,100)

2019
£000

(37,811)
35,225

(2,586)

(4,311)
7,342

3,031

39,771
467
(4,311)
485
5
(1,269)

35,148

(40,360)
(31)
–
(469)
(5)
7,342
1,269

(32,254)

2018
£000

(34,238)
30,330

(3,908)

Analysis of the remeasurement of the scheme surplus/(deficit)
Return on scheme assets (excluding amount shown in interest income)
Changes in assumptions underlying the present value of the scheme’s liabilities

Remeasurement of the pension scheme surplus/(deficit)

Movement in the fair value of scheme assets
At 1 January
Interest income
Return on scheme assets (excluding amounts shown in interest income)
Contributions from the Company
Contributions from scheme members
Benefits paid

At 31 December

Movement in the present value of scheme liabilities
At 1 January
Service cost
Past service cost (curtailed due to closure of scheme)
Interest cost
Contributions from scheme members
Actuarial gain/(loss) in the year
Benefits paid

At 31 December

Present value of defined benefit obligations
Fair value of scheme investments

Pension scheme surplus/(deficit)

2022
£000

(21,100)
24,670

3,570

2021
£000

(32,254)
35,148

2,894

2020
£000

(40,360)
39,771

(589)

Return on scheme investments

(9,656)

(3,844)

5,864

6,179

(22)

Percentage of scheme investments

(39.1%)

(10.9%)

14.7%

17.5%

(0.1%)

Experience adjustment to scheme investments

(10,316)

(4,311)

5,164

5,336

(817)

Percentage of scheme investments

(41.8%)

(12.3%)

13.0%

15.2%

(2.7%)

Experience adjustment on scheme liabilities

10,321

7,342

(3,466)

(4,298)

1,587

Percentage of scheme liabilities

(48.9%)

22.8%

(8.6%)

(11.4%)

4.6%

Defined contribution schemes
The Company also participated in a defined contribution scheme, the Macfarlane Group Personal Pension Plan. Contributions 
to the plan for the year were £32,000 (2021: £31,000) with contributions £6,000 (2021: £3,000) payable to the plan at the 
balance sheet date.

42. Related party transactions
Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation in 
the Group financial statements. The Directors have considered the implications of IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’ and are 
satisfied that there are no other related party transactions occurring during the year, which require disclosure, other than 
those already disclosed in these financial statements.

Overview  |  Strategic review  |  Governance  |  Financial statements  |  Shareholder information 
132 

Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2022

Principal operating subsidiaries and related undertakings

Company name

Principal activities

Country of registration

Tel: 02476 511511

Tel: 0116 2641050

Tel: 01209 204777

Macfarlane Group UK Limited 1
Coventry  
Nelsons for Cartons & Packaging Limited 1
Leicester 
Carters Packaging Limited 1
Redruth 
Ecopac (U.K.) Limited 1
Aylesbury 
GWP Group Limited 1
Swindon 
Nottingham Recycling Limited 1
Nottingham 
Macfarlane Group B.V. 2 
Hoofddorp 
Tel: 00 31 235689207
Macfarlane Packaging Ireland Limited 3
Wicklow  

Tel: 00 353 1281 0234

Tel: 0115 986 7181

Tel: 01296 652700

Tel: 01793 754444

PackMann Gesellschaft für Verpackungen  
und Dienstleistungen mbH 4
Eppelheim  

Tel: 00 49-6221 759090 

Supply and distribution of all forms of packaging materials and 
equipment. Design and manufacture of specialist packaging.

Supply and distribution of all forms of packaging materials 
and equipment.

Supply and distribution of all forms of packaging materials 
and equipment.

Supply and distribution of all forms of packaging materials 
and equipment.

Design and manufacture of specialist packaging.

England

England

England

England

England

Recovery of waste paper and corrugated board for recycling.

England

Supply and distribution of all forms of packaging materials 
and equipment.

Supply and distribution of all forms of packaging materials 
and equipment.

Supply and distribution of all forms of packaging materials 
and equipment.

Netherlands

Ireland

Germany

All the above subsidiaries are wholly owned either by Macfarlane Group PLC or one of its subsidiary companies and operate in the 
country of registration. The Group controls 100% of the ordinary share capital of each subsidiary.

The Group’s other related undertakings are the dormant subsidiary undertakings disclosed below. In all cases the Company listed  
as owner controls 100% of the issued share capital of the dormant subsidiary undertaking.

Company name

Company number

Country of registration

Owned by Macfarlane Group PLC
National Packaging Group Limited 1 
Adhesive Labels Limited 1

Owned by Macfarlane Group UK Limited
Online Packaging Limited 1 
Macfarlane Packaging Limited 5 
Abbott’s Packaging Limited 1 
Mitchell Packaging Limited 1 
Greenwoods Stock Boxes Limited 5 
Network Packaging Limited 1 
One Packaging Limited 1 
Tyler Packaging (Leicester) Limited 1 
Harrisons Packaging Limited 1 
Leyland Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited 1

Owned by GWP Group Limited
Eastman Packaging Limited 1 
The Great Western Packaging Co. Limited 1 
Corstat Containers Limited 1

Owned by Harrisons Packaging Limited
Temperature Controlled Packaging Limited 1

Owned by Network Packaging Limited
Networkpack Limited 1

01355867 
00723320

02903657 
SC041678 
00372831 
00535311 
SC576825 
03400627 
09647045 
03460830 
06999588 
03775077

03837450 
02455095 
02454197

06896225

07076439

Registered offices
1 Siskin Parkway East, Middlemarch Business Park, Coventry, CV3 4PE
2 Siriusdreef 17, 2132 WT, Hoofddorp, The Netherlands
3 6th Floor, South Bank House, Barrow Street, Dublin 4 

4 Wasserturmstraße 79, 69214 Eppelheim, Germany
5 3 Park Gardens, Glasgow, G3 7YE

England 
England

England 
Scotland 
England 
England 
Scotland 
England 
England 
England 
England 
England

England 
England 
England

England

England

 
 
 
Financial diary

Financial results
Interim: Announced – August 
Final: Announced – February

Accounts and Annual General Meeting
Report and financial statements – Posted to shareholders on 31 March 2023 
Annual General Meeting – Held in Glasgow on 9 May 2023

Shareholder enquiries
Macfarlane Group PLC’s ordinary shares are classified under the ‘Industrial – 
General’ section of the Industrial Sector on the London Stock Exchange.

Enquiries regarding shareholdings, dividend payments, dividend mandate 
instructions, lost share certificates, tax vouchers, changes of address,  
transfers of shares to another person and other administrative matters  
should be addressed to the Company’s registrars, 

Equiniti 
Aspect House 
Spencer Road 
Lancing 
West Sussex, BN99 6DA

Telephone: 0371 384 2439 
Website: www.shareview.co.uk

The Company’s website, www.macfarlanegroup.com provides details  
of all major Stock Exchange announcements, details of the current share  
price and information about Macfarlane Group’s business.

 
M

a

c

f

a

r

l

a

n

e

G

r

o

u

p

P

L

C

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

2

2

Head Office
Macfarlane Group PLC
First Floor 
3 Park Gardens 
Glasgow G3 7YE 
t. 0141 333 9666 
e. investorinfo@macfarlanegroup.com
www.macfarlanegroup.com